Key words: Bibliography, Education, Social, Paradigm, Women, Research, Psychiatry, Politics, Books, Special Violence, Integrity, Medicine, Evolution, Children, Systems, Solution.
(Click here for photo of the author.)
Bibliography For A Paradigm
Written and Compiled by Neil R. Miller
(c) 1983-2001, San Francisco
Doctors and Diamonds . . . 16 new titles (titles only), February 12th, 2002
Just Three Hours . . . Neandertal Introduction, October, 2001
Just Six Numbers . . . a review of a physics book, October, 2001
Diamonds and Math . . . September 10th, 2001Four-Page Adobe Acrobat *.PDF file, 800k
also: Cast for 'Just Yesterday' (appended to 'Flying Blind') - June 7th, 2001
2. Related Files at this Web Site
- 1997
4. Introductory Text - 1983 and 1994
5. Journal Citations - circa 1983
8.
March 31st - Albert Ponders
May 1st - Maya Glows
August 18th - Shanghai Glistens
September 6th (*.pdf only) - Math Crystallizes
February 12th, 2002 - Speak
September 9th, 2001
In Black and White, Adobe Acrobat *.pdf, for viewing and printing. 800K
page two - - Pearls . . . three ideas
page three - - Math . . . seventy books
page four - - Locket . . . one idea
Page Eight Update: September 6th, 2001
In Black and White, Adobe Acrobat *.pdf, for viewing and printing. 1.5 megabytes
page one - 1974 to 1994 - History, Psychiatry, Women (150 titles)
Home Page Introduction - March 1st, 2001
![]() ![]() |
![]() |
![]() |
![]() |
![]() |
![]() |
Most recent update to the file below:
Paradigm from California, Volume I: Appendix III (circa 1983, 1998)
Bibliography For A Paradigm
Written and Compiled by Neil R. Miller
(c) 1983-1998, San Francisco
Note:
To Reach the Home Page of this Website
and an index to the 50 slides and papers
that form the context for this document
click here for the text only home page
click here for the graphics home page
stardate: March 1st, 102001
Currently Relevant Files At This Web-site, Are As Follows.
The Silver Locket --- The Proposal (Acrobat *.PDF only)--- October 2000
Beyond the Wave --- The Warm Caress of Deep History --- November 1996
The Magic Sentence --- In Pursuit of a Simple Equation --- November 1999
Schema --- Science, Medicine, and Social Relations --- March 1985
Flying Blind --- The Politics of American Science --- May 2000
The Sky Buckle --- The Science of American Politics --- March 2001
Summary --- Science, Cognition and Frameworks --- June 1992
On Elections 2000 --- American Politics --- November 2000
Bibliography --- 120 Book Reviews --- 1978-1999
Autobiography --- Notes on Discovery --- March 1994
American Pearls --- 200 Word Summary --- July 2000
stardate: May 5th, 102001
9. 2001 - 3,000 words - The Silver Locket. pearl
8. 2000 - 50,000 words - Lucy and Neandertal, Affection and Cognition. conversation
7. 2000 - 5,000 words - Flying Blind. fog
6. 1999 - 15,000 words - In Pursuit Of The Magic Sentence. magic
5. 1997 - 50,000 words - Bibliography. gridwork
4. 1996 - 12,000 words - Beyond The Wave. women
3. 1995 - 20,000 words - Web Site. politics
2. 1993 - 15,000 words - Summary. cognition
1. 1985 - 10,000 words - Schema. medicine
Beginning just above, are the ten major paradigm manuscripts available at this web-site in chronological order.
1. The Silver Locket - 3,000 words - 2001
2. Everything else.
The sixty documents at this web-site, for which this bibliography serves as reference,
each explain either some element within this paradigm, or the paradigm as a whole.
Although the explanations are made through many different fields,
"All roads lead to Rome", so to speak.
The In-From-The-Blue-Approach - - Inner States as Transferable Substance - - (1986)
The Moral Approach - - Good and Bad - - (November 13,1994)
Guide to This Document
Individual Best Books Sections:
22 books. This is a set of reviews that were originally written during 1996 for a group concerned with violence against women. They are written in a casual, somewhat personal style, and I've included them at this site without re-editing for a general audience.
'Beyond the Wave'. This started out as a book review, written for that same anti-violence against women group mentioned above, of Riane Eisler's "Sacred Pleasure: Sex, Myth, and the Politics of the Body". I found that I had to include a discussion of Riane's earlier, classic work, "The Chalice and The Blade: Our History, Our Future", and in the end, this piece became an overall statement of my own understandings regarding the origins of cooperative society generally and the political role of the feminine character.
What happened was that I realized, suddenly, in a stroke, that there was an entity influencing my own and my students' intelligence, their (and our and my) emotions, and their (and our and my) governing structure; an entity that was 'bigger' than something that they were feeling or something that was happening to them. Someone had already picked up a trail; it was up to me to track it down. The words "family pain" introduced me to a 'larger' class of entity, some sort of 'unknown' substance, "among people and through history", as I would put it. It was eighteen more months before I discovered "tenors", that very same entity but in full, scientifically self-evident, fleshed-out form. But when I read that first line a year and a half earlier, barely twelve hours after the most profoundly devastating experience I've ever encountered, right away, I knew I could pin that down, whatever it was that Satir was talking about, molecule for molecule and electron for electron. Get that 'ghost', and bring it out into the clear light of day. And I knew that nailing it - 'family pain' or whatever it really was - and tracing it, atom for atom and wave for wave, through the hierarchies and through history, was quite likely to turn out to be the decisive element that leftists had failed to seriously account for, all these years, and all these millennia.
I knew I could do it, I knew I could get it, but I was constantly terrified that I wouldn't be able to do it in time, wouldn't be able to catch up; unfortunately, I was right about that, nightmarishly so, day in and day out through much of the eighties, and even still, so far. An eleven year unbroken string of failure, so far . . .
The bibliography that follows is actually our "Index To Available Articles" from our last research terms at J. E. McAteer High School, SFUSD, eleven years ago. Research class, about thirty kids, mostly tenth and eleventh graders, would be figuring out about whatever the term's main topic was, 'drugs', or 'close friendships', or 'the advertising industry' or whatever it was that term, and would be looking around for some high level clues on the current subject. We usually tried to avoid the mass media, or anything broadcast or 'popular' (people generally knew that anything that sounded like it might have come from television would throw me into a, well, usually well-controlled, white rage), so for some of our best source material, especially in the last year, we'd go to a medical library, find their major journal index, and look up some key words in the index; then zerox the Index pages that had the listings.
Back in class with the zeroxed indexes from the library, the relevant small groups would comb through the zeroxed index pages of titles to see if there was anything that any of them might want to look at in connection with what they were doing. Medicine is great that way: the titles of professional articles are not designed as cute attention grabbers but are rather designed to be actual, literal descriptions of the content - spectacularly convenient for directly finding useful things.
Of course, I'd go over the index lists and pick out a lot of the stuff myself, most of it really. And obviously I had a rather narrowly focused, overall theme in mind - namely interactional psychiatry. I was essentially looking for the hard, cold, grounded, scientifically articulated and self-evidently proved structural blueprints for things like "object relations" and the "id" and all that type of stuff.
I should mention that, after intensively pouring over all these articles and books, for months and months, I finally did indeed find exactly the blueprints I was looking for, all precise and pristine and in all their glory, in the work of John Bowlby. Science, at last. Ten years later, it still looks to me like he's written the best science book anywhere in the English language, as best I can tell, anyway.(footnote 1)
Anyway, back in class with the photocopied indexes, by pencil or typewriter (this was olden times), we'd copy out the library specifications of the articles we wanted, organize the list by journal title and date, and, dressed to kill, and solemn as deacons and quiet as mice, we'd go back to the library, creep deep into the stacks, hunt 'em down and photocopy 'em. Reams of stuff.
Back in class with the copies, we'd cut out the pages and arrange them neatly on double 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 pages, paste them up in the kind of order where they would read like a book, paste on our own two-letter index number, and then take the paste-ups down to the regular copy place.
There, we'd make from three to thirty finished copies of each article, depending on if I wanted to use it in class or if we thought a lot of people would want to see it, or whatever.
And Deanna carefully saved and filed our gorgeous collection of "flats", the original paste-ups, which could be used at any time to instantly produce one or more perfectly book aligned copies. At the time, we all thought of it as creating and building a system for developing a massive base of documentation for years and years of all kinds of curriculum. But, . . . <<< ruined! Everything, all our work, years and years, Ruined! >>> . . . Uh . . . .
. . . anyway, back in class again, we'd cut the pages, punch holes, and file the sections in a couple of neatly indexed, portable file drawers that we'd built for the purpose, out of silver and gold leaf cardboard, with red and black trim; when they were opened, all shimmering inside, it kind of looked like a treasure chest in a pirate's den.
Everyone in research - and some of the background kids - had a 3 punch binder of their own, and people would peruse the bibliography and take various collections of these articles from the file chests for their binders. I think, in the last terms, I must have taught half my research classes and a quarter of my background classes directly out of the books and articles in this bibliography.
In background (my 'elementary' class, mostly ninth and tenth graders), I'd isolate a paragraph or a couple of paragraphs from this or that article, and work out its meaning on the blackboard, phrase for phrase, word for word, sentence for sentence, paragraph for paragraph, trying to put it into whatever overall point of view that I figured the author was presenting, that is, identify what the problem is that the author is supposed to be solving.
Exams would often include some "sentence cracking" questions, where I'd give the students some string of jargon from this or that article and the students' job would be to accurately sort out just what the sentence meant, in their own words. I got this big 'ole unabridged dictionary, which had most of the medical terms in reasonable language, which was kind of fun; some days, background classes were kind of like a cryptogram treasure hunt, only, through the Byzantine corridors of medical ideology.
It was in background too, that I first began listing on the blackboard the various ideas in such a way that, while I didn't notice it at first, when I stepped to the back of the classroom, I 'flashed' that I'd been arranging them in 'logical levels', and immediately thought 'so this must be what Watzlawick's really talking about. This is what Bertrand Russell's and Alfred North Whitehead's discovery was really all about'.
Something that is a single system, a one, alone, system made up of many elements, works on an entirely different type of logic, an entirely different pattern of thinking, than one of those "elements among many in the system". Everything can be rationally and easily combed out, if it's just remembered that the logic is different for "a whole system" from the way it is for "an element among many". It was a flash, in the grand old 60's sense, and it has stayed with me at the front of my mind, down to this very day.
Anyway, thereafter, in background class especially, I more and more consciously tried to work out visual arrangements on the blackboard that separated the many 'lower level' ideas from the fewer, higher level - or 'meta' level - ideas, sometimes trying various acrobatics like attempting to show four or five logical levels or using about twenty different technicolor colors of chalk to try to distinguish 'types of' elements in the paragraphs we were studying.
It was all pretty crude then, and it was a full year - mid-1984 - before Deanna's 20 drawings of the official "Paradigm from California Logical Types and Logical Levels Mathematical System" in Chapters Two, Four, and Six of the paradigm proper finally got it done right. Those twenty drawings are the pride and joy of Part I of the paradigm; in an important sense, they are foundation for it.
In research, we went over the articles and chapters from the file chests much more finely than in background, and referred to them constantly in the course of dealing with the various research topics of those terms. A couple of times in research, we read out little skits using the psychiatric case histories or the verbatims in the family sessions.
I think we all felt that the whole problem being addressed in these materials was pretty close to home, like, in our face, like, right now, for everyone, all the time; and nobody ever got stupid with the stuff we read, just like everyone was extremely cool about what they knew about each other - I mean, every student was hand-picked by me for this class, mostly girls too, and all the boys being very respectful of the fact that the entire background/research/photography/music operation - and its group leaders and directors - were, quite deliberately, mostly girls, in some cases all girls, and also, mainly, this was "research class", something that people elected to take very seriously.
Anyway, I remember that I always liked it when the research class did 'Annabelle' readings, from Haley's "Leaving Home"; that was a favorite of mine, a real sweetie-pie, that Annabelle, as I recall. (footnote 2 - important note; please read)
Well, anyway. There's an old saw, something to the effect that in good education programs, it's the teacher who learns the most. I suppose. I suppose it can't be denied that the person who made the most use of these materials was me directly. I probably looked over just about every article, attempting to get some sense of what the article was about, and carefully read maybe thirty or forty percent of them. At one time I figured I'd read pretty carefully about five or ten thousand pages overall during that two or three year period, actually, mostly from big 'ole psychiatry textbooks.
But alongside, for months on end I was massively 'force-feeding' myself these articles, shoveling them into my brains, morning and night, line for line, phrase for phrase, word for word. A good deal of it was slow, and lot of it seemingly either impenetrable or nonsensical - often I couldn't tell which - but I felt like I had to 'crack' everything I ran across.
A lot of the things going on at that time, to me and around me and to the people I knew, and in the world at large, were pretty unpleasant, terrifying actually. For much of the time I was in what they call high level "acute panic states", including a continuous fourteen months of that at least, a totally non-stop, day and night, feverish, desperate nightmare, January 15th '83 to March of '84, enough to put most people away forever, big time. footnote 3
Perhaps I should mention that after writing the paradigm, I became less interested in "interactional psychiatry" per se, and, except for Bowlby's "A Secure Base", I haven't touched an article in this field in about six or seven years. By the time I finished writing Paradigm Volume II in '86, I had already switched back to a more traditional type of subject for me, a body of literature about the history of the Industrial Workers of the World and Big Bill Haywood. After that, it was mainly paleoanthropology for a while, and, this current couple of years, the subject is 'special violence' (rape, torture, child abuse, prostitution, and the like).
Of course, it's not the same, figuring alone; you don't learn a tenth as much, not to mention it's not so much fun.
Give me a team, like those McAteer classes, all hand-picked, mostly girls, allegedly naive and in fact, eminently realistic, all insiders on the outside; give me a team to figure with like that again and this time I'd rule the world. People would love it too. Everybody'd love it. And I do mean everyone.
Anyway, books, especially well printed, non-fiction, accuracy-based hardcover books, obviously humankind's greatest achievement.
But anyway, who were the most influential writers, or "attachment figures" at that particular moment as I sat down to write this paradigm? I suppose I'd have to say, Dr. John Bowlby of the United Kingdom, number one, first and foremost, for his attachment schema; and then, after that, first Dr. Salvador Minuchin of Philadelphia, for hierarchies; then Dr. Harry Stack Sullivan of New York, for interaction; then Dr. Paul Watzlawick of California, for logical levels. Not among the most influential in my life though (except Bowlby).
That's reserved for the likes of people like, first, Pete Seeger, then, Malcom X, John Bowlby, Thomas Paine, Rosa Luxembourg, William D. Haywood, Karl Marx, Marilyn Monroe, Mao Tse Tsung, Marja Curie, John Lennon, Fidel Castro, Albert Einstein, Patrice Lumumba, Gold Flower, Amilcar Cabral, Galileo Galilei, Alexi Kosygin, Nicholaus Copernicus, Abraham Lincoln, Victor Jara, Paul Robeson, Henri Cartier-Bresson, Fredrick Engels, Franklin Delano Roosevelt, Fiorello LaGuardia, Vo Nguyen Giap, Jose Marti, Chu Teh, Jean Piaget, Dorothea Lange, Marja Gimbutas, William J. Clinton, Alice Vachss, Dana F. Fleming, Hillary Rodham Clinton, Riane Eisler, Israel A. Miller, Marilyn Saltzman Webb, Michael Parenti, Ellen C. Beckmann, Thomas Kuhn, Karen Garrison, Alex Webelman, Lesa Broncato, Norman Bethune, Tupac Amaru, Heidi Steffans, Augusto Sandino, Bernadette Devlin, Sheri Majewski, Marcia Rosser, Sophie Scholl, Maxim Litvinoff, Charles Darwin, Holly Near, Camilo Cienfuegos, Fredrick Douglass, Eileen Rose, Frida Kahlo, Keiko Shimosato, Jean-Paul Marat, Danaan Smith, Margaret Thayler Singer, Deanna L. Pinkston, Ludwig von Beethoven, Jay Moss, Frances Levine, Ruth Massey, Katherine Paterson, John Fitzgerald Kennedy, Salvador Allende, Antoine-Laurent Lavoisier, communists all, with minor exceptions here and there.
Well, for me, taken together, they constitute the great politburo in the sky, so to speak, the main committee, the god committee, again, so to speak, all of them projecting a remarkably accurate rendering of the highest level of human and biological purpose - and the best clues regarding precious value in daily life.
The famous doctors, on the other hand, are usually of a very different genre; you might say they 'sit at a different table', being ever so rigorously trained and so tightly maintained in the high level of capitalism (cannibalism) and the most criminally deranged and grotesque forms of fascism, and anyway, you have to remember, both Minuchin and Watzlawick specifically, alongside literally scores of physicians nation-wide over a decade's time, turned noses up and thumbs down at this paradigm specifically. An impenetrable, criminally sociopathic wall of ice and ridicule, to this very day.
But, all the same, in this paradigm, the doctors rule.
The accuracy-based/human-health mix, which is the overt focus of the field of Medicine, turns out to be a unique and superior combination, unbeatable in modern scholarship for the purposes of overall paradigm structure. As it turns out, along with Drs. Bowlby and Sullivan, Drs. Minuchin and Watzlawick were indeed the most influential researchers, clinicians, theorists, frontiersmen, at the front of my reasoning at that particular, year-long moment when this paradigm took shape in my head.
Oh yes, almost forgot. And of course, my dad, Dr. Israel A. Miller, MD, a Brooklyn pediatrician of sixty years, fifty in continuous local practice, a lecturer on the effects of parental interaction on child health for the New York City Dept. of Health from the days of LaGuardia to the '60s, a family medicine pioneer, a founder of the short-lived New York City Physicians Union, a founder and director for thirty years of one of the first - or the first - group health insurance centers in the country, and that very much directly in the teeth of the McCarthy days, and the kindest, most deeply principled person I ever knew; my father, an attachment figure par excellence, for me really first and foremost, big time, although I didn't realize it for a long long time, and he never really knew it.
Why Family Therapy aa. footnote 4
The Study of The Family ab.
Family Rules: Marital Quid Pro Quo ac.
Family Rules: Family Life Styles. ad.
Family Myths. ae.
Marital Disappointment And Its Consequences For The Child.
af.
What All Children Need In Order To Have Self-Esteem. ag.
Toward A Theory of Pathological Systems. ah.
Frame of Reference. ai.
A Family In Formation: The Wagners and Salvador Minuchin aj.
Toward a Theory of Schizophrenia ak.
Pathological Communication. al.
Communication Theory. am.
A Family of Angels. an.
The Growing Edge. ao.
Leaving Home (Excerpts). ap.
Resistance To Change In The Psychiatric Community. aq.
Paradoxical Communication ar.
The Myth of Normality. as.
The Double Bind As A Universal Pathogenic Situation. at.
Alcohol And The Family System. au.
The Role of the Family in the Treatment of Chronic Asthma.
av.
Toward The Differentiation of Self in One's Family of Origin.
aw.
Family Reaction To Death. ax.
The Utopia Syndrome. ay.
Spontaneity. az.
How The Voice Works And Why The Voice Does Not Work. ba.
Hysterical Personality. Childhood: From Process To Structure.
bb.
Whither Family Therapy. bc.
Family of Origin As A Therapeutic Resource For Adults
In Marital And Family Therapy: You Can And Should Go Home Again.
bd.
Failure of Historicity. be.
The Family Life Cycle. bf.
From Object Relations To Attachment Theory: A Basis For Family
Therapy. bg.
The Marital System of The Hysterical Individual. bh.
The Case of Helen D.: A Woman Who Learned To Suffer. bi.
The Addict As Savior: Heroin, Death, And The Family. bj.
Fixation And Regression In The Family Life Cycle. bk.
The Family Life Cycle: Developmental Crises And Their Structural
Impact On Families In A Community Mental Health Center. bl.
Popularity Or Influence? The Use of Citation Index To Identify
Leaders In Family Therapy. bm.
Marriage And Midlife: The Impact of Social Change. bn.
The Hysterical Personality. bo.
Individuation: From Fusion To Dialogue. bp.
The Paradoxes of Intimacy. bq.
Redefining The Problem: Family Therapy With A Severely Symptomatic
Adolescent. br.
Converting Denial Systems Into Personal Power. bs
Mother and Daughter - An Epitaph. bt.
"Pram Lamentis" or She's A Young Thing And Cannot
Leave Her Mother. bu.
In Pursuit of Sisterhood: Adult Siblings As A Resource For
Combined Individual And Family Therapy. bv.
Family Therapy And The Concept of Sprezzatura. bw.
The Internalized Emotional Structure For Unleashing Creativity
And Expanding Consciousness bx.
The Healthy Family. by.
One Night Stands: A Challenge For Family Therapists. bz.
Family Therapy As Reciprocal Emotional Induction. ca.
Transmission of Values Within A Traditional Family Structure.
cb.
Tips For Clients: How To Screw Up Your Marriage Counseling.
cc.
Treatment of The Character Disordered Family Member. cd.
Double Bind Technique Or How To Drive People Mad Without Their
Knowing It: A Manual For The Malevolent. ce.
A Guide To Parents: How To Raise Your Daughter To Have Multiple
Personalities cf.
The Family Pride Factor In Family Therapy. cg.
Kiss The Frog: A Therapeutic Intervention For Reframing Family
Rules. ch.
Paradoxical Communication As Interpersonal Influence. ci.
The Second Wave And The Second Generation: Characteristics
of New Leaders In Family Therapy. cj.
Toward A Reassessment of Women's Experience At Middle Age.
ck.
Hysterical Personality Traits: Psychological, Social, And Iatrogenic
Determinants. cl.
The Little Girl, The Family Therapist, And The Fairy Tale,
A True Fable: Based On an Intensive Family Therapy With A Low
Socioeconomic Level Family Where A Little Child Was Identified
Patient. cm.
Symptom Bearer As Marital Distance Regulator: Clinical Implications.
cn.
Power Relationships In Families: A Social-Exchange Perspective.
co.
Family of Origin: The View From The Parents' Side. cp.
The Influence of Pornography On Sexual Development: Three Case
Histories. cq.
Dynamic Considerations of The Hysterical Psychosis. cs.
The Marriage of Families: Cross-Generational Complementarity.
ct.
On Cognitive Disorders In The Obsessional. cu.
Parental Communication Deviance As A Predictor of Competence
In Children At Risk For Adult Psychiatric Disorder. cv.
On Aggression In The Obsessional Neurosis. cw.
China's Marriage Law: A Model For Family Responsibilities And
Relationships. cx.
Narcissism And Dependency In The Obsessional-Hysteric Marriage.
cy.
Birth Parents Who Relinquish Babies For Adoption Revisited.
cz.
Families And Adolescent Drug Abuse: Structural Analysis of
Children's Roles. da.
The Symbolic Drawing of The Family Life Space. db.
Persistent Themes: A Naturalistic Study of Personality Development
in the Family dc.
Psychopathology And Shamanism In Rural Mexico: A Case Study
of Spirit Possession. dd.
The Oral, Obsessive, And Hysterical Personality Syndromes.
de.
Dissociation of Self-Reported and Observed Pleasure in Depression.
df.
Psychoneurotic Disorders. dg.
Selection Criteria for Family Therapy. dh.
The Topsy-Turviness of Mrs. Piggle Wiggle: Its Symbolic Significance.
di.
A System for Tailoring Change Measures to the Individual Family.
dj.
Marital Conflict and Marital Intimacy: An Integrative Psychodynamic-Behavioral-Systemic
Model. dk.
Relabeling and Reframing Reconsidered: The Beneficial Effects
of a Pathological Label. dl.
A Bibliography of Paradoxical Methods in Psychotherapy of Family
Systems. dm.
Some Notes on the Use of Family Sculpture in Therapy. dn.
Susan Smiled: On Explanation in Family Therapy. do.
"She Is Just Not an Open Person."; A Linguistic Analysis
of a Restructuring Intervention in Family Therapy. dp.
The Removal of a Psychosomatic Symptom: Effects On a Marriage.
dq.
A Family Myth: Sex Therapy Gone Awry. dr.
Using Systems Theory to Organize Confusion. ds.
The Logical Levels of Complementary, Symmetrical, and Parallel
Interaction Classes In Family Dyads. dt.
Differential Diagnosis of Fugue-Like States. du.
Dissociation of Pleasure In Psychopathology. dv.
The Dissociation of Dissociation. dw.
Truth Therapy/Lie Therapy. dx.
Developmental Perspectives on the Bipersonal Field. dy.
The Hysterical Personality Disorder: A Proposed Clarification
of a Diagnostic Dilemma. dz.
The Problem of Divided Consciousness: A Neodissociation Interpretation.
ea.
A Single Sample Study of Dissociation Between Expressed and
Experienced Pleasure by Gender In Mild Depression. eb.
"Nontherapy" Family Research and Change In Families:
A Brief Clinical Research Communication. ec.
Toward a Metacommunicational Framework of Couple Interactions.
ed.
Normative Family Stress: Family Boundary Changes Across the
Life-Span. ee.
How One Family Perceives Another: The Relationship Between
Social Constructions and Problem-Solving Competence. ef.
Family Paradigm and Family Coping: A Proposal For Linking the
Families Intrinsic Adaptive Capacities to Its Responses to Stress.
eg.
Social Networks, Support, and Coping: An Exploratory Study.
eh.
Family Therapy With Adolescents: Treatment of a Teenage Girl
With Globus Hysterious and Weight Loss. ei.
On The Differentiation of Self. ej.
Harry Stack Sullivan's Concepts of Personality Development
and Psychiatric Illness. ek.
Protection For Caretaking Into Caretaking: Vitality, Intelligence,
Security - A Public Education Paradigm. el.
Parallel Development: Emerging Post-Parenthood And The Late
Adolescent-Early Adult Stage of The Family Life Cycle. en.
The Birthday Party: An Experiment In Obtaining Change In One's
Own Extended Family. eo.
Sexual Dysfunction And Hysteria. ep.
A Nurse, A Family, and The Velveteen Rabbit. eq.
More Book Reviews. er.
The Family Life Cycle: Developmental Crises and Their Structural
Impact on Families in a Community Health Center. es.
Freud and Man's Soul. et.
From Instinct to Identity (excerpts). eu.
Psychosomatic Families (excerpts). ev.
Hysteroid Dysphoria. ew.
Development of a Theory: A History of a Research Project.
ex.
Varieties of Consensual Experience. I. A Theory for Relating
Family Interaction to Individual Thinking. ey.
Varieties of Consensual Experience. II. Dimensions of a Family's
Experience of Its Environment. ez.
Family Process Index: 1982. fa.
Book Reviews From Family Process. fb.
Enemies and Allies, 1917 - 1945. fc.
The Cold War in Europe, 1945 - 1950. fd.
The Life and Emotional Problems of Harry Stack Sullivan. fe.
Psychoanalysis and Child Care. ff.
An Ethological Approach to Research in Child Development.
fg.
Childhood Mourning and Its Implications for Psychiatry. fh.
Effects On Behavior of Disruption of An Affectional Bond.
fi.
Separation and Loss Within a Family. fj.
Self-Reliance and Some Conditions That Promote It. fk.
The Making and Breaking of Affectional Bonds. fl.
Subliminal Perception and Perceptual Defence. fm.
The Language of Change. footnote.
The Kaplan Family. fo.
The Flawed Fix - The Use of Mind Altering Substances in America.
fp.
An Epic Struggle. fq.
Bibliography: Articles and Books Available From Research.
fr.
Gold Flower's Story. ft.
Geraldine, Eight When Mother Died. fu.
Gina - Excerpt From Intensity. fv.
Understructure of The Finopolitan Elite. fw.
Assembling a New World of Facts. fx.
The Medusa and The Snail. fy.
An Apology. fz.
On Societies As Organisms. ga.
Work and Personal Development. gb.
The Dream. gc.
Women's Place in The Integrated Circuit. gd.
Families. ge.
Joining. gf.
Planning. gg.
Change. gh.
Reframing. gi.
Enactment. gj.
The Medusa and The Snail. gk.
Attachment, Separation, and Loss. gl.
The Making and Breaking of Affectional Bonds. gm.
John Bowlby Book Review. gn
Case for The Study of Small Groups - Orientation and Role in
The Small Group. go.
Letter to a Responsible School Official. gp.
Articles On Education Accompanying The Letter to School officials.
gq.
Harry Stack Sullivan: His Life and His Work. gr.
Classroom Texts - Psychiatry (lecture materials - 1982 - 1983)
Politics, History, World Systems
Classroom texts, psychiatry - 1982 to 1983
. . . Primary Authors
John Bowlby, MD
footnote 5
Volume Two: Separation: Anxiety and Anger.
Volume Three: Loss: Sadness and Depression.
The Making and Breaking of Affectional Bonds ·°·°·
The Psychiatric Interview.
Clinical Studies in Psychiatry.
The Treatment Techniques of Harry Stack Sullivan.
·°·°·
Harry Stack Sullivan: His Life and His Work.
·°·°·
Families and Family Therapy. ·°·°·
Family Therapy Techniques. ·°·°·
Families of The Slums: An Exploration of Their Structure and
Treatment.
The Interactional View. ·°·°·
Change. Principles of Problem Formation and Problem Resolution. ·°·°·
The Language of Change. Elements of Therapeutic Communication. ·°·°·
How Real Is Real? Confusion, Disinformation, Communication.
Reflections On Therapy and Other Essays. ·°·°·
Uncommon Therapy: The Psychiatric Techniques of Milton H. Erickson,
MD. ·°·°·
Classroom texts, psychiatry - 1982 to 1983
. . . Secondary
The Manufacture of Madness.
Sex By Prescription.
Classroom texts, psychiatry - 1982 to 1983
. . . Tertiary
Therapy, Communication, And Change.
Identity: Youth And Crisis.
The Informed Heart.
Mind and Nature. A Necessary Unity.
Classroom texts, psychiatry - 1982 to 1983
. . . More Systems Materials
The other half of those classes, were derived from current periodical literature, three quarters from the left, and one quarter from the right-wing, plus a very small amount of material from mass media sources.
The political journals are, unfortunately, not listed in this bibliography. Hopefully, they will be added at some point.
So, here is some primary source material for a middle school/high school program. These are the books that change the world. These are the books that should rule the world. Not the low level incidents reported - but rather, the author's understanding about those incidents. That understanding should rule the world.
. . . Politics, History, World Systems
Volume Two: The Cold War In East Asia, 1945-1950; The Second
Cold War, 1950-1960 ·°·°·
Classroom Texts - 1977 to 1983
. . . The Perpetrators
Classroom Texts - 1977 to 1983
. . . The Witnesses
Classroom Texts - 1977 to 1983
. . . Photography
Classroom Texts - 1977 to 1983
. . . China and France
Classroom Texts - 1977 to 1983
. . . Labor
Classroom Texts - 1977 to 1983
. . . Medicine
The Medusa And The Snail. More Notes of A Biology Watcher.
·°·°·
____________________________
Note: For the purposes of this bibliography, for some books
on this page and the next, I used the author's academic title
rather than the sales title.
Zia *
The Chalice and the Blade by Riane Eisler
A Secure Base by John Bowlby
Lucy by Donald Johanson and Maitland Edey
Against the Current by William D. Haywood
The Splendid Blond Beast by Christopher Simpson
The Assault on Truth by Jeffrey Mason
Rocking the Cradle of Sexual Politics by Louise Armstrong
Sex Crimes by Alice Vachss
Backstreets by Cecilie Hoigard & Liv Finstad
Tender Mercies by Keith Richards
Child Slaves by Peter Lee-Wright
And They Call It Help by Louise Armstrong
Witchcraze by Anne Llewellyn Barstow
Fear in Chile by Patricia Politzer
Tune in Tomorrow by Tom Tomorrow
JFK: Reckless Youth by Nigel Hamilton
Anything written by John Bowlby
Anything written by Louise Armstrong
Anything written by Christopher Simpson
Any talk given by Michael Parenti
Any performance by The San Francisco Mime Troupe
Any cartoon by Tom Tomorrow
Anything at all by Pete Seeger
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Special thanks to: Modern Times Bookstore, Old Wives Tales Bookstore,
and UCSF Medical Center Bookstore in San Francisco for, at one
time or another over the past twenty years, stocking each of the
books in these bibliographies, which, for the most part, is how
I found them.
(December 1, 1996)
The above bibliographic text and bibliography were last amended in mid-1995 and have essentially not been updated since then. In the meantime, between mid-1995 and the present (November, 1996), I have discovered about 100 additional books of particular relevance to this paradigm, and managed to read about 35. Listed immediately below are my 'picks' from this new list, and following that, the full listings and citations.
Please Note: This section is under construction, and the listings as well as the general organization are not yet completed. Planned also are one-line descriptions or comments . . .
Please Note Also: With the exception of some of the psychiatry texts in the first section of the bibliography, and a very few others throughout, all of the books listed in these bibliographies are ones that I found to be very useful, and to-the-point of this paradigm, and, for the most part entirely readable as well. In other words, this entire bibliography is the "recommended reading" list for grasping this paradigm. Still and all, there were some books that struck me, given my situation, as particularly illuminating and enlightening. Highlighting those is not meant to detract from the others that are not highlighted. I found each book in these bibliographies, with very few exceptions, to have a profound and to-the-point story to tell.
Hitler's Willing Executioners: Ordinary Germans and The Holocaust, 1996, by Daniel Jonah Goldenhagen
Trauma and Recovery: The Aftermath of Violence, 1992, by Judith Lewis Herman, M.D.
The Scapegoat Generation: America's War on Adolescents, 1996, by Mike A. Males
Aman: The Story Of A Somali Girl,, 1994, as told to Virginia Lee Barnes and Janice Boddy
The War Against Children, 1994, by Peter Breggin, M.D. and Ginger Ross Breggin, 1994
Bridge of Courage: Life Stories of the Guatemalean Companeros and Companeras, 1995, by Jenifer Harbury
A Secure Base: Parent-Child Attachment and Healthy Human Development, 1988, by John Bowlby, M.D.
Little Girls in Pretty Boxes: The Making and Breaking of Elite Gymnasts and Figure Skaters, 1995, by Joan Ryan
Spoken in Darkness: A Small Town Murder and a Friendship Beyond Death, 1994, by Anne Imbre
We, Chile: Personal Testimonies of the Chilean Arpilleristas, 1996, edited by Emma Sepulveda
Women In Exile, 1994, by Mahnaz Afkhami
Sacred Pleasure, 1995, by Riane Eisler
Daughters of the Pacific, 1994, by Zohl De Ishtar
Rape Warfare: The Hidden Genocide in Bosnia-Herzegovina, 1996, by Beverly Allen
Runaway: Diary of a Street Kid, 1995, by Evelyn Lau
Unchained Memories: True Stories of Traumatic Memories, Lost
and Found, 1994, by Lenore Terr, M.D.
Reviving Ophelia: Saving the Selves of Adolescent Girls, 1994, by Mary Pipher, Ph.D.
Out of the Shadows: Women, Resistance and Politics in South America, 1993, by Jo Fisher.
Memoirs from The Women's Prison, 1991, by Nawal el Sa'adawi.
A Woman Scorned: Acquantaince Rape on Trial, 1996, by Peggy Reeves Sanday.
Nightwork: Sexuality, Pleasure, and Corporate Masculinity in a Tokyo Hostess Club, 1994, by Anne Allison.
Cults in our Midst, 1995, by Margaret Thaler Singer and Janja Lalich.
Voices of the Survivors, 1994, by Patricia Easteal.
Exploring The World of Lucid Dreaming, 1990, by Peter LaBerge.
Dating Violence, 1991, edited by Barrie Levy.
Magic Eyes: An Andean Girlhood, 1992, by Wendy Ewald.
In the Freud Archives, 1986, by Janet Malcom.
Date Rape: The Secret Epidemic, 1993, by Marcia Mobilia Boumil, J.D., LLM., Joel Friedman, Ph. D., and Barbara Ewert, J.D.
This is the best book I read in the last year and a half, the best of forty very carefully selected books. By far. For these last few years, Daniel Goldenhagen walks away with The Oscar for Best Book.
I do have disagreements, to be sure, but they're minor. Basically, for what I personally felt like I needed to know and didn't about daily life right here in river city, for me, this was the book of the year.
Drag that phenomenon out into the clear light of day, everywhere, that's the only thing that's going to stop them. I'm pretty sure.
When Women Rebel, 1985, by Carol Andreas
(book read: March, 1997; annotation written: March 15, 1998)
I read this book about a year ago, just before I started writing annotations for this booklist, and I don't remember it that well. I originally picked it up because of the words " . . . Value of Ordinary Things" in the title (and because there was a new hardcover available, at a used book price, in the window of my friendly local bookstore, in this case, Aardvark, on Church Street). Anyway, I had a bit of a problem with the book, as it didn't seem very focused as regards either politics, economics, or quantification, but I think it turned out to be helpful to me all the same.
As I recall, it starts with the author sitting in a cafe, sipping coffee, reading a newspaper, and looking out the glass window of the cafe at the comings and goings on the street outside, and wondering about whereform these ordinary things originated. (Funny; a cafe is where I was during the days I read that particular book - a Starbucks on 24th Street . . . so I wondered along with her . . .)
Anyway, beans, coffee beans; paper, newspaper; glass, glass window . . . she wonders who makes them and what does it take to keep those who produce these things going, so they can keep producing them. The value of the glass, the paper, the beans, is really all tied up with the cost of the things the workers need to survive. It's a different approach from measuring value by what price people will pay for the finished work, and in fact, I though her approach was kind of fascinating.
There's "value", as in the cost of making the finished work, centrally including the living and daily life expenses of the people who make it,
and there's "value", as in the price people are willing, or are able, to pay.
Those are two different ways of determining "value", two different things entirely, and, as I recall, she doesn't deal much with the latter, but rather concentrates on the daily life - and its expenses - of the people who are producing the valuable things. It is there, she seems to think, in the lives of the people who produce the things, that the value actually rests. I kind of like that approach. Refreshing.
She examines the daily lives of a family in a struggling coffee cooperative in Mexico, a supervisor at a glass works in, Pennsylvania I think it was, and a forest worker, eastern Canada, as best I can recall. Anyway, she visits them, watches them at work, listens to them, and writes of their families, their struggles, their co-workers, their history, their suppliers, and the prospects for their continued employment, or co-op employment, or self employment - each situation was different. The book does take an interesting look at the human business, and cost, of producing a few of the ordinary everyday necessities that we all more or less take for granted.
I remember when I'd almost finished the book, I was suddenly inspired to write the "configuration" section of the Schema/Backbone paper, the flagship paper at this web-site, and it was the first new section I've written for that paper in quite a long time. That section notes that things are made up of the high level assembly - the "configuration" - of low level raw materials, rather than things being made up of the low level raw materials - the atoms and molecules, by amount or weight. It is that "assembly", the "configuration of atoms", not the atoms themselves, that constitutes things of value to humans.
I was kind of pleased with that new section of the "Backbone" paper that I wrote right after reading this book. It's not the first time I thought of this matter of "the 'assembly' of the atoms" - the way the atoms are configured, and what it takes to configure them, being the things of value - rather than the atoms themselves being the things of value; I'd originally written a version of that idea in a section of the paradigm twelve years ago, but this book, 'Glass, Paper, Beans' did seem to focus my mind on the subject, in perhaps a more to-the-point way, and I'm sure it must have salted in some new elements, so I am appreciative of Leah Cohen for it. Thank you.
Thus, in Budapest, the Jews were confined to ghettos, crammed into tiny apartments, made to wear the yellow star, picked out, one by one, but not yet wholly exterminated. But suddenly, in late 1944, with the Americans approaching the German border in the west, and the Russians pounding into Poland and Hungary from the east, Hitler suddenly remembered the quarter-million Hungarian Jews who'd they forgotten to exterminate, and dispatched Adolph Eichmann to Budapest to hurriedly round them up and dispatch them to Auchwitz, with the guns of liberation already audible in the distance.
"Castles Burning" is the story of Magda Denes and her brother, her mother, and her aunt and grandparents, furtively, desperately scurrying from place to place, hiding under floorboards, in attics, packed into basements like sardines, starving, sometimes covered with lice, attempting to escape the shootings and deportations.
Magda, a gorgeously intelligent and literate little girl is five years old at the start of the war, and twelve by the time escape is fully effected. A kind of Hungarian Anne Frank, Magda has to live by her wits, and that of her loving brother's and proud and vigilant mother, dodging the Germans, the fascist Arrow Cross, the neighbors, the American and British bombings, even the Russians, and god knows what else, effecting a five-year long heartbreaking, harrowing, and loss-filled escape. An incredible, riveting story of strength, tears, abandonment, charm, loss, and attachment.
This is my third reading over the past twenty years, and at first, it seemed like old hat, but I am struck by how much about human interaction, and the role of metaphor in science, that I got from Thomas. And some of it is still new. Like Bowlby, like Watzlawick, like Minuchin, like even Eisler (who came much later), this is '60's science, par excellance. A brand new high level of strict, formal science emerged, nothing like it since.
Douglass' acute and penetrating observations regarding the psychiatry of slave holders shows a brilliance rarely seen nowadays. At one point his slavemaster allowed him to work as a city craftsman for wages, all of which Douglass, of course, would turn over to his fundamentally deranged [my wording] owner. Sometimes the slaveholder ('master', in the vernacular of the day) would give him a few nickels to spend as a reward. In modern US culture, people would (severely inaccurately) say that the master thought he was being generous, and was "in denial" regarding such obscene robbery. Not Douglass. He writes: "The fact that he gave me any part of my wages was proof, to my mind, that he believed me entitled to the whole of them." (emphasis mine). He didn't fall for this "in denial" garbage (regarding perpetrators), which is so tragically and inaccurately in vogue these days. Douglass knew that these thieves were fully conscious of the fact that they were nothing more than sleazy thieves. Douglass' intellect is most refreshing, to say the least. His whole being is like that: clean, articulate, thoughtful, highly principled, brilliant.
An important, core history of 'the Sixties'; this book is often difficult and confusing (for me, anyway), as so much of the discussions that Echols' reports are "perception-based" (see footnote 7), but I'm finding it personally fascinating, riveting actually, as it (finally) illuminates events and currents that I eagerly followed in print at the time, but didn't really understand, as I was totally excluded from these circles when it was happening. Now I get it, a little more, anyway.
But it does seem like they never touched the issues of accuracy, integrity, logical levels and mathematics, archeology, psychiatry, the specifics of how things are supposed to be, formal science, and a host of other decisively central stuff, just like everyone else didn't touch that stuff either in those days, or since for that matter.
It seems like the earliest pioneers - mid to late sixties; the Westside group in Chicago, the DC women's group, and later Redstockings in New York - had some of the best clues, but somehow, every time, so much of the overall women's movement theories seemed to veer off, into a kind of one-against-the-other overall framework, into "the dominant paradigm" as they say, albeit well-disguised, time and time again . . .
Enduring and poignant images of Marilyn Webb being heckled from the SDS stage "Take her off the stage and f__k her . . .", and later, back at the women's group office, being expelled for elitism, Shulamith Firestone exasperated beyond words at constantly being thrown back to square one, the Gloria Steinem row . . . the thinking and actions of scores of individual women, and groups of women talking, writing, pondering, acting, "Notes From The First Year", lots of things I remember vividly, things I remember vaguely, and lots and lots of things I'd never heard about at all, this book covers the major ground at a critical eight-year moment in American history . . . excellent and comprehensive documentation . . .
In the end, I found this book very exciting, but . . . it looks to me like the issues being hashed out twenty-five and thirty years ago are still unresolved, still waiting to be resolved . . . as if the serious "conversation-about-the-conversation" (my term), never really happened quite well enough, if it happened really at all . . .
"The Personal is Political" was stated again and again, but just what that means, in terms of the sort of cooperative overall change in societal dynamics that everyone seeks, was never defined in a relevant enough manner, best I can tell. By my lights, it's almost as if, in terms of theory anyway, "the clocks stopped around 1972" (my phrase), and somehow have not really rolled on very much since then.
Frankly, that seems true of a lot of "high-level" "basic science" type fields . . . nobody's topped Lewis Thomas (biology, 1972), John Bowlby (interactive health, 1968), Paul Watzlawick (communication, 1967), Salvador Minuchin (hierarchy, 1967), Marija Gimbutas (1964), and later, Riane Eisler (humanity as matrifocal) . . . anyway, the 1960's, the most important advance in the logical level of science since the turn of the century, best I can tell . . . nothing even close since . . .
If the imbecile capitalist financiers and technicians had one ounce of brains (which they obviously don't), but if they did, they would back their rabid monsters off of the Clintons and let The President and Mrs. Clinton do their stuff . . . It is liberalism that produces logical levels of scientific advance; on the other hand, political reaction produces nothing - it merely consumes what the liberals produced the last time around . . .
Even to the reactionaries, I would note: "You know, you don't get to rape it later, if you don't allow the liberals to produce the gridwork in the first place . . ."
Well, I suppose what the reactionaries are most afraid of is, "just one more round of Genuine liberalism, and the reactionaries are scared they'll be found out, once and for all, scared that they'll never get it back . . . "
It seems as if they worry that, in just one more Genuine round of liberalism, the whole system of horror, deception, and political-reaction could be exposed in a way that dissolves that entire right-wing System, right to the bone of its dishonesty core, and therein bars the return to power of the reactionary persuasion, forever.
In my opinion, they have damn good reason to worry about that . . . it's exactly what I have in mind . . .
Well, back to "Daring to Be Bad", at any rate, for me personally, the conversations reported in Echols' book, from all those years ago . . . feel like just last week . . . and (sigh) feel like right now . . . a progressive movement, still waiting in the wings . . . over-ripe for a new round of geometric advancement . . .
This seems to be a major blockbuster . . . analyzes the profoundly vicious racial propaganda directed at the American people regarding the Japanese during the Second World War . . . I was born in 1944, and, although I never realized it, in reading the first two chapters, I was absolutely stunned at how much of this imagery I picked up and internalized, as so much of it was still present when I was growing up . . . I thought I was immune to this sort of stuff, but you can't contradict what you don't even know you've absorbed . . . let that be a lesson to me . . .
also details the anti-Western racial propaganda of the Japanese . . . in the Japanese propaganda, American "individuality" was evidence of a beast-like 'dog-eat-dog' nature, using movies of gangster and Western shoot-'em-ups as examples . . . and clips of American treatment of black people . . . meanwhile, the Americans depicted the Japanese concern for group and community as evidence of a mindless, fanatical, automaton-like nature, deserving of extermination, using Japanese movies to make the point . . .
Early on, in the anti-Japanese propaganda draft scripts that the U.S. War Department solicited, the Japanese people were depicted as under the thumb of repressive militarists who were responsible for the war, but these scripts were rejected in favor of a propaganda policy depicting the Japanese people as uniformly savage . . . all paving the way for the merciless bombing of Japanese civilian cities and that ultimate, deranged war crime, Hiroshima . . . and, a profoundly brutal "take no prisoners" strategy which prevailed in much of the Pacific war . . .
Although in the U.S. war films regarding Europe, it was often not the Germans, but the Nazis who were depicted as the enemy, with references to "good Germans", but in regard to the Japanese, there was no such provision . . . every Japanese was depicted as the embodiment of the "Yellow Peril" . . .
For the American propagandists, this was a good 'ole fashioned, All-American Race War . . .
I personally, have much respect for President Roosevelt, but this one does not speak well for him. Not at all, not at all. Mr. Roosevelt, hopefully unwittingly, set up the climate for Hiroshima; not good. Perhaps he was just naive, but when it comes to Franklin Roosevelt, married to Eleanor Roosevelt, that's hard to swallow. In the current day, regarding immigrants, and poor people, and especially regarding workers, indigenous peoples, and women throughout the third world, Mr. Clinton, BEWARE.
Sure, Roosevelt (following Churchill's plan) helped set up Pearl Harbor, a "little deception", expedient; maybe it seemed ok at the time - someone had to stop the US Nazis in their tracks, ok. But my guess is, he had a heart attack in his grave when those atom bomb gas chambers from the sky were dropped on Japan. Worse still, when those SS legions were brought in to lead US policy councils after the war (see Christopher Simpson's "Blowback", listed elsewhere on this page). In politics, like in psychiatry or science (see next review), "little" deceptions, when they involve whole classes of people or populations, sooner rather than later, always come home, big time . . .
At the present moment, sure, everyone loves a "strong" economy, but watch out what you set up in the course of it . . . when you're gone, all the worst of it will come slamming home, Hard. If Mr. Roosevelt could speak, he could tell you that . . .
Back to the book though: Dower reports much of the historical background of the war against Japan, and some that too, was new to me. With all I knew of the European war, it never occurred to me that, in South Asia and the near Pacific, the Japanese were not invading sovereign countries; they were expelling Europeans from long, tormentuous Western colonial rule. Churchill was said to be more traumatized by the fall of Malaysia than by the Battle of Britain . . . the American rulers more traumatized by the fall of the Philippines than by Pearl Harbor . . . the French lost Indochina, the Dutch, Indonesia . . .
Apparently the Asian people were alerted to the fact that Asians could defeat Westerners, leading, presumably unintentionally, to the formation of armies of national liberation all across the area, including of course . . . the Viet Minh in Vietnam . . . Was Hiroshima, in part "pay back" for awakening the peoples of Asia . . . ? My guess is, probably yes . . .
And of course, on all those savagely contested Pacific Islands . . . there were indigenous people living - and dying by the tens, even hundreds of thousands - under those bombs.
I learned of this book from footnotes in Zohl De Ishtar's "Daughters of The Pacific", itself a brilliant study of the peoples of the Pacific Ocean in the current day . . . 'War Without Mercy' is an obscure book, but it should not be . . . very highly recommended . . .
(Reread)
Like rereading Thomas' "Lives of a Cell", at first this seemed 'old hat', like, ' . . . I know this stuff already . . .' But then, about twenty pages into it, he notes a fascinating point. At the time (around 1895) that Freud figured out that childhood trauma, particularly rape, causes mental disturbance in adulthood, Freud was also developing a "systems" type biological structure for understanding the processes. That was a very advanced formulation, and the one widely accepted today ("systems" type structure is the model I use throughout "Paradigm from California").
But when, out of fear of obscurity and murder, Freud decided to lie about what he knew and claim that the women had just made it all up, that the middle-class men of Europe were not raping their daughters, that his patients had not suffered actual sexual abuse, that it was "all in their head", well, in order to cover that preposterous claim, he could no longer pursue the accurate systems model, because that model necessarily describes interaction between people. So he reverted to an old, inertia/hydraulic model, a "build-up and release-of pressure" type model, so as to account for "it's all within". But that internal-hydraulic way of looking at psychiatric matters bears no relation whatsoever to the processes that are taking place; it is what is generally called, crackpot 'science'.
He (Freud) settled on the toilets of Europe as the appropriate structural model for the psychiatric system; perhaps it's what came to his mind alongside assuring the parents of Europe that they could rape, beat, and exploit their children at will. Freud was assuring them that it would be ok, that if anyone complains, we'll just later claim that it never happened, they made it all up. Apparently, the entire European generation that included Hitler's parents, and the parents of the Holocaust/perpetrator generation at large, took that to the bank.
Freud was desperate to make psychiatry a formal science, but in telling just that one "little" lie (just to survive, you understand), about girls just making it all up, he had to drop the brilliant, strictly scientific structural path, "systems theory", that he was developing, and instead, fall back on a "build-up-pressure/release-pressure", crackpot/satanist model. One little lie, and science disappears, with a toxin in its stead.
An archetype example, perhaps The archetype in science, of a case of one little lie turning the whole world nightmarish for a century to come.
Bowlby doesn't say any of that, of course. That's me talking. Bowlby's so polite, I can hardly stand it . . . how does he do it, how does he stay so calm in the face of this stuff . . . he must be superman . . . . . . but I am reminded that, aside from the information that Bowlby presents, his writing style and frame of thinking seems to exude pure intellectual protein, in a way that is entirely analogous to protein for the digestive system, or oxygen for the circulatory system. In this case, besides the information itself, equally, or perhaps more important, is the way it is presented, the context, the configuration of the information. Just as a few carbon atoms by themselves don't mean anything, but once they are configured into protein, the molecules have high value to life, just as oxygen atoms won't do anything, but once they are configured into O2 they have high value to life; so too, some ink on paper, some photons, and some electrons buzzing through the central nervous system doesn't mean anything - unless it is configured in a certain particular way.
Again, as regards what this bioecosystem, and every human in it runs on, it is not matter or mass that has value, it is configuration from which life is drawn and maintained. (See "Paradigm Summary", and "Schema" at this site, and Chapters 2, 7, 15, and 16 of the full Paradigm for more on this.)
Anyway, the words of John Bowlby seem, to me anyway, to be packed with extreme-high-value intellectual mental organization, gridwork, nutrients, very much like digestive nutrients or circulatory nutrients - a few words pack a profound punch. "Attachment and Loss" almost seems like what some call "The Good Book" . . . John Bowlby: Obewanknobe, Moses, Lenin, all rolled into one . . . a genuine oracle, as in days of old . . . and right here in river city too, any bookstore in town . . . I am going to attempt to reread this Attachment and Loss series slowly, over many months.
I usually don't read this publication, but in inquiring about books at a bookstore that I rarely frequent, the bookseller pulled this back issue out of an old box from somewhere, and I decided to read it. It turned out to be entirely informative, and quite current, even though it was two years old. A couple of the pieces were written in the no-real-truth style that I find so unhelpful, but, for the most part, the articles were enlightening, and even comprehensive within their subject. An interesting group of stories.
By this time, I'm pretty good at selecting books to read that I'm going to like, but this is an exception. The problem with this one is that the writer doesn't seem interested in what these people, the gypsies, actually do for anyone - either the world around, or each other. Her focus is on what they have or do not have. It's all about the state of their protection, again, what they have; nothing about their caretaking, what they do of value. Very little on child-raising; very little on the active part of their culture. When they wash clothes thoroughly, it's not in order to be clean and disease-free, given their impoverishment and history of dusty traveling, no no, to Fonsecu, it's in order to follow a ritual. Nothing really has any useful function; things that are traditional are, according to her, symbolic, rather than useful or practical; a typical capitalist academia line; "postmodernism" I think they call it, or something like that. I guess I should have known; with previous credits from the likes of The New York Times and The Wall Street Journal, of course her mind-frame would be all about having things or not having things, not about doing anything for anyone. The book is also loaded with descriptions of life after the destruction of socialism as if that's representative of socialism. Sort of like killing off something, and then explaining that this death-state was what things were like when it was alive, very typical of contemporary anti-communist writing. Lots of absurd sniping, like lamenting that under socialism, people were "terrorized" into eliminating the old kill-and-be-killed blood feuds, but now that the evil communists are gone, revenge-killings and blood feuds are back. Ain't that great, why, they have their culture back. (As if she's got the slightest clue as to what the word culture means.) So, this book is one of the rare ones on this list that is not recommended.
A very brief description of the scope and level of state-sponsored violence in Columbia. Informs of the extreme brutality that both intellectuals and peasants are currently subject to. In the background, one gets the sense that there must be some major positive political movement in the works to engender this sort of extremely brutal and widespread political reaction, but the book doesn't mention much about that. It does go into detail, however, about the fact that Columbia has generally, more than any other Latin American country, always adopted the forms and propaganda of democracy rather than declaring itself a military dictatorship, as did other large Latin American countries. However, under that "propaganda-of-democracy" form, the Colombian military (as always, under US corporate direction and guidance) has managed to impose the most voluminous record of savagery on the continent.
The second half of the book explains how, in order to appear more democratic, much of the death-dealing apparatus was switched over from the military to the paramilitary and develops an interesting analysis of paramilitarism generally. I have to say though, I found the writing style, especially in this second half, really really difficult, unnecessarily so, as best I can tell. Still and all, much of the information is new to me, and much welcome. It makes me want to find a good book on Columbia.
Marcia's book gives excellent detail, and even some context regarding the famous Simpson case in Los Angeles, for which she was the prosecutor. I've tuned in to almost nothing about the case from the news media, so this was the first serious account of it that I've read. Gil Garcetti (the Los Angeles District Attorney) apparently decided to pick an ace, extremely hard-working, straight-shooting ADA to be prosecutor, as, I suppose, he didn't want the slightest hint (from the DA's office, anyway) of deception or corruption, given the volatility of the Los Angeles climate. And Marcia filled the bill admirably. But she was up against, what I understand to have been a formal right-wing barrage of techniques for confusing the real with the unreal. While some of that, of course, is typical of trial stuff altogether, it seemed to be the whole emphasis in this case - not from Marcia's perspective, but from everyone else's.
Anyway, I always saw the defense team as putting on a political trial; a huge advertisement for "no-real-truth", right from the start; a right-wing political propaganda offensive. In some ways, it almost reminded me of the Patty Hearst trial here in San Francisco some years back. Not the specific roles of course (there was no Marcia Clark at Patti's trial), but in the function of the trial as a super-dose of right-wing propaganda. Sophisticated, reactionary (and in part, race-driven) "Psywar" against the population at large.
Well, on the subject at hand, one of the most interesting parts of Marcia's story involved the evolution of the Domestic Violence aspect of the case. She gives very relevant, and difficult, information about her own life and personal history, and then mentions how hard it was for her to develop a domestic violence trail to the killings. She reports that Chris Darden insisted that the domestic violence history must be pursued, and she eventually turned that portion of the case over to him. What I found most fascinating, but what was never developed, was what seemed to me to be the parallel difficulties that both the women of the jury, and Marcia Clark, had facing the fact of, and the long term psychological effects of, violence against women generally. If there ever was an issue by which she could bond with the jury, that was certainly it, but in this case, she was being run ragged, 18 hours a day, non-stop, and there was no time for in-depth long-range strategizing, and no time for figuring out anything new. And there would certainly have to be a lot figured out regarding how that is to be faced with a community under racial siege.
Although she couldn't pursue it in this trial both for personal and political reasons, it is much to her credit that she states, quietly, but clearly all the same, that she knew, "deep down", that that was the heart of the case. I cried and cried when I read that . . .
Marcia wrote this book like she prosecuted at the trial - competent, thorough, principled, well-organized, in-context, and very much to-the-point. A very good book.
This, is an amazing publication. It lists the 500 books produced by Human Rights Watch and currently available, taking a close and detailed look at each of hundreds of different human rights problems throughout the world, including some in The United States. The titles themselves are highly descriptive; you can almost read the catalogue itself, like a book, and become highly informed.
The books listed run about 150 pages and cost $10 to $15 each. Human Rights Watch also produces a 4-page/10-issue per year newsletter informing of the 70 new books per year produced. Write for catalogue to: Publications Department, Human Rights Watch, 485 Fifth Avenue, New York, NY 10017-6104. (212) 986-1980.
For someone who thinks about social issues, this seems to be an invaluable resource. I think that every high school library in the country should have a complete set on hand. I suppose that would cost perhaps 10 million dollars, but it seems to me that that would be a very wise move on someone's part.
Written with Gregory R. Tate and Kate Chumley, with some assistance from yours truly, and directed by Michael Sullivan. Starring Michael Oosterom, Velina Brown, Conrad Cimarra, Ed Holmes, Keiko Shimasato, and Amos Glick; Approx. 1 hours, performed three times per week all summer in the parks of the San Francisco Bay Area (Click here for the sfmt home page, or here for the schedule, or here for the program notes)
This isn't really a book that I've read, but I have been going to Mime Troupe shows since the early 1970's, including seeing about ten or twelve performances of each of the last five summer plays, so I thought I'd include this play in the book list.
Over the years, some Mime Troupe plays are about local events, some are about history, some are taken from classic plays, and some grope more or less directly at the high level system of things. This year's seems to be more of the latter category. One of the newspaper critics seemed to think it was less focused than plays on more local themes, but I myself kinda like that 'groping at the high level' stuff.
Anyway, this summer's performance is about some kids (well, forgive me, in their late twenties anyway), living their life, but "going nowhere", "killing time", and also several corporate types, destroying the planet, and apparently enjoying themselves at it. First, we're introduced to the kids' housemate adventures, and then to the corporate partners in crime, way above . . . and then they all find their way to the great campgrounds (Bohemian Grove) and have a bit of a conversation, Mime Troupe style . . . included also is a fascinating rendition of Mr. Clinton.
And, as always with the Mime Troupe, there's a representative of " . . . The Maaaain Branch in the sky . . ." (a line from an old Mime Troupe play) threading through, "holding the pencil-point down", so to speak. This year, the part is wonderfully played by Velina Brown. All very well done, sparkling, and lots of fun.
By the way, for persons unfamiliar, the name "Mime", as a name, is almost an albatross, and derives from only their first season back in the sixties; since then they've intended it to mean - a most energetic and vocal 'reflection of life'.
Anyway, their dialogue is ace - succinct, clear, rapid fire, and often hilarious, as are the songs as well. And for some reason, from way back, I've always found the staging, and, really, the acting in particular, to be extraordinarily attractive and compelling.
I've always thought of The San Francisco Mime Troupe as the best political theater that I know about anywhere, particularly considering its amazing consistency over thirty-five years. (I do remember that I saw Michele Linfante and the Lilith Theater do a couple of seasons that were totally incredible, back around 1977, and maybe have seen a few others here and there but the Mime Troupe is the only ones that I know of that do it on target, always at this high professional level, year after year, decade after decade.)
So anyway, if you're in San Francisco in the summertime, or near an SFMT tour performance during the year, the 'resonance' from these folks is always very strong and very helpful. And very entertaining.
Note to the reader: I have decided to include here a 4,500 word essay on the causes of schizophrenia, which occurred to me upon rereading this book, and that I deem to be of political significance. For those who wish to skip to a shorter, 1,000 word summary of this matter, click here; for those who wish to skip this item entirely, click here.
I initially read this book in early 1983, some fourteen years ago, when I was completely immersed in these subjects - "family therapy", "double bind", "human communications", and all that stuff - and I've long since integrated all that I then figured out into "Paradigm from California", but it's been almost ten years since I seriously read anything about these sorts of dynamics. For some reason though, I almost idly picked this book off my bookshelf last week and, bemused, started reading it, this time, from the beginning (last time around, I only read the main articles - about half the book - and passed over Sluzki's commentaries and other apparently tangential materials).
This time though, by about page twenty, I was saying to myself, ' . . . gosh, I was bored to tears with this book once already, why the hell am I boring myself by reading it again . . .' But there was something about it . . . maybe it's the pretty, mustard yellow hardcover binding, with the electric blue lettering that got to me . . . can't tell exactly . . . I'm a sucker for well-bound hardcover books . . . But then again, Carlos Sluzki, and also Gregory Bateson, are a couple of the most boring, opaque writers I've ever had occasion to study. Sluzki is also someone I personally had trouble with all those years ago, when he was supervising a therapist in Palo Alto that I was seeing for a while. But anyway, despite all that, after reading a few pages of this book last week, for some reason, I decided to keep going, and sat down to read it, this time, cover to cover and word for word. Sure enough, I think I'm seeing something new, something currently relevant regarding paradigm issues (and personal issues) that I'm currently working on, something major.
First, what's the "Double Bind". It starts with Gregory Bateson. He was a famous high level British scientist (incidentally, Bateson was married to Margaret Mead, the famous anthropologist, but that's another story altogether).
Anyway, Bateson knew a lot about mathematics, and anthropology, and schizophrenia, and around 1952 (forty-five years ago), he got together with several American scientists in Palo Alto, California (including Don D. Jackson, MD, Jay Haley, John Weakland, Richard Fry, and later, Paul Watzlawick), and together they began a project to determine if there was some connection between modes of human communication and the causes of the mental illness known as schizophrenia. (I think Margaret T. Singer and Virginia Satir were also involved with that crowd for awhile, at least tangentally.)
But anyway, the project started with a grant from The Rockefeller Foundation, and in 1956, the team published what became a very famous paper identifying a communications phenomenon they called "The Double Bind" as decisively present in the families of severely disturbed young people suffering from acute or chronic mental illness.
Briefly, the Double Bind is defined in the following way: The parents set up a context for communication with their child which is basically contradictory. The classic example is the parents insist on being viewed by their child as loving parents, while giving powerful, but never discussed signs that they are uncaring towards their child. "We love you" are the words, but 'we don't love you' are the actions and the signs. That's the overall - high level - but covert message that their children get. At the low level, the parents insist that the child love them back, but, again, the parents reject signs of affection from their child, while scolding the child for being unloving.
So that's two of the elements of the "double bind" - 1. High level message: we don't love you but we say that we do, and 2. Low level message: You must love us/keep your distance. A couple of pretty nasty contradictions for a small child to sort out, since he's just little, and is totally dependent on his or her parent's love.
The third element is that the child cannot walk away from such confusion, as he is attached and entirely dependent on his or her parents - that is, the child cannot "leave the field", and the forth element is that the child cannot discuss these contradictions and confusions, for if he does he is exposing the parents as being bad parents, and dishonest, and if he attempts to expose that, he will be severely punished, one way or another.
Finally, the fifth element is that this is not a one-time or occasional event, but rather is the whole ongoing mode of the parent/child relations in "schizophrenic families".
Again:
1. We show you we don't love you, but you better believe we do (high level context);
What happens, is that the child's mind is formed in an ongoing state of bewilderment and confusion, with no ability to figure out what is real and what is unreal, can't quite grasp what a person's statements actually mean, develops a chronic panic, anxiety, hallucinations, rage, and then psychotic - even violent - episodes, and begins round after round of incarceration in mental institutions.
(Of course, in the institutions, the "doctors" replicate the double-bind, in force: i.e. "we're-here-to-help-you/we're-here-to-make-more-money-by-keeping-you-crazy-and-protecting-your-parents", etc. etc., but that's another story . . . )
Anyway, back at the ranch in Palo Alto, all the several scientists on Gregory Bateson's team in the early 1950's were either psychologists or psychiatrists who had worked extensively with schizophrenics and had recorded and studied many families of schizophrenics, and they all came to the conclusion that this dynamic of "schizophrenic communication" in families was a leading, or the leading cause of this sort of mental illness. Of the hundreds of anecdotes they'd accumulated, they give one exemplary anecdote in their original 1956 paper, which was widely quoted thereafter; it's about a young man who was confined in a psychiatric hospital:
For those unfamiliar with psychiatric literature, you should know that it is important to not to make too much of a single anecdote, especially regarding a single incident. Such things are designed to show a general illustration, and are not designed to be a detailed description of a syndrome. Still and all, it gives a sense of the subtlety and power of this sort of interaction.
She comes to see him, which is an overt statement that she cares. When he touches her, she recoils, a far more powerful (covert, unstated, overall, high level) sign that she doesn't like him. Then she accuses him of not loving her as shown by the fact that he withdrew from her. He is unable to sort out what the hell is going on, and becomes so agitated that he has to leave the room, confirming her charge, or does it . . . or what the hell did she mean ? In a rage, he assaults the next authority figure that he sees, and has to be restrained . . . all further confirming how crazy he is . . . (!!!)
The essential problem, really, is not a matter of there being a simple contradiction - a simple contradiction is common, normal occurrence, that the human mind is designed to cope with. The essential problem is that there is no continuity between the "high level" information, that is, the all-powerful, overall, but covert, context of the situation - no continuity between that and the low level instructions given.
The way life works, you have to have an accurate idea of the overall context of your situation, in order to develop a realistic view of your choices of action within that context, and the consequences of any one of those choices.
To use a very crude metaphor, if you can't tell if you live in the mountains or by the sea, you're going to spend your life falling off cliffs or drowning, and never being able to tell exactly what the hell is going on.
You have to learn how to understand the terrain, in order to know what you can and cannot do in it.
But when these kids are growing up, they are barred from learning how to understand the terrain.
According to the writers of the 1956 paper, Bateson et. al, the schizophrenic's mind was formed in a situation where they learned that there was no solid terrain; no matter how they attempted to deal with the "terrain" (their relationship to their primary attachment figure), they were punished, and so they never learned how to judge what the context of their life was. Do they care for me, or do they want me to go away - no clues, and punishment any which way you turn. Bewilderment, confusion, betrayal, psychosis, et voila, schizophrenia.
Anyway, I should mention that there are some qualifications regarding this matter. For one thing, back in those days, psychologists were attempting to prove things through laboratory experiments. Thus, many laboratory studies were employed to attempt to prove that "double binds" cause schizophrenia. Unfortunately, all the laboratory experiments (maybe fifteen or so that were tried) came up empty-handed. Some said that this proved the double-bind theory was all bunk. But others (including me) say that you can't exactly confine a child in a laboratory for a couple of years and keep double-binding him to see if he eventually becomes schizophrenic. Not exactly ethical, if you know what I mean.
The best they could do was give some volunteers a bunch of confusing questions to see if they would then exhibit signs of the mental illness. But that's never going to even nearly approximate the important conditions leading to the illness.
A second qualification to keep in mind is that a little bit, just a little double-binding, might not be such a bad thing. I mean, a little uncertainty, sometimes, about the way the world is, can cause you to have to look at things "from outside" the context of your life. That can lead to some serious, very useful creativity. But, BUT, BUT!!!, a whole childhood full of that, or an ongoing situation at all, or at crucial stages of life, or imbedded in some primary relationships, or under traumatic stress, or during times of other stress when you need certainty and support - in those situations "schizophrenic communications" can and often does lead to horrifying mental situations, including lifelong mental crippling, self-destructive behavior, even criminal behavior, and, very much, suicide. Very very bad stuff to happen to a kid. An ugly situation.
So anyway, what's all this have to do with "Paradigm from California", which is essentially a political paradigm, designed to solve the political and social problems for the whole world. Ok. That's the part that I find a little bit new, with this current reading of the book.
First of all, I find it fascinating that the original grant for Bateson's project, back in 1952, was from The Rockefeller Foundation. Rockefeller, the old John D. of 19th century robber-baron fame, was the guy who was in love with the ability to "communicate" in such a way as to rob other people 'till they dropped - Native Americans, laborers, politicians, and anyone else he could strip of their resources, their land, their wealth, or their labor or other power. I think the famous quote was something like: 'I will pay more for an employee's ability to communicate, than any other ability', or something very close to that.
Little wonder that his heirs would be most interested in Gregory Bateson's project to refine the field of human communications ever more sharply. But when Mr. Bateson's project began to get close to actually, publicly exposing the whole sick, schizophrenia-producing "double bind" dynamic, Rockefeller withdrew funding, I think in 1954; public exposure is not something Rockefeller is inclined to pay for. Macy's, the famous sales organization, then took up the slack for a little while, and backed the next phase. But, my guess is, Bateson and Jackson (Don D. Jackson, MD, the other heavyweight) were warned - 'don't get too close'.
Sure enough, thereafter, while the discoverers of the double-bind made vague, one-line allusions to the general applicability of their discovery beyond mother/child relations, regarding social, institutional, and political implications, their allusions remained just that - a line or two vaguely mentioned at the end of this paper or that, nothing more.
Thereafter, in the project itself, mama was the big bad-guy honcho, and the original core project never really went much beyond that.
Indeed, for the next twenty-five years, "The Double Bind", and the paradoxes therein derived, became the foundation of half of the entire, huge, "Family Therapy" school of psychology and psychotherapy, generally known as "Strategic Family Therapy".
(The other half of the "Family Therapy" field - which is the one I preferred - was headed up by Salvador Minuchin of Philadelphia, who focused on healthy hierarchical family arrangements, and healthy boundaries between family members, and went by the name of "Structural Family Therapy", but that's another story entirely.)
Anyway, the point is, the Double Bind idea was never, to my knowledge, systematically applied, in the large scale way it should have been, to analysis of how the corporations and their institutions manage to strip bare the world's entire population and resources, while convincing the billions suffering under starvation and torture that it's really their own fault. Obviously, curing that problem is where the theory should have gone next, but, surprise, no surprise, it didn't. The foundations, academia, and the professionals just didn't seem to be interested - I wonder why . . . (sarcastic; I don't really wonder why . . . ).
So anyway, Paradigm from California. This is what occurs to me:
First: It is an obvious fact of life that this bioecosystem operates on a singular reality system, in which illusions play a mostly, but not always, helpful role. When something is true, it has the properties of being consistent with everything else that's true, accessible via anyone's cognitive mind, constant for all time, and the same for everyone. (See my paper "The Nature of Truth" at this site.)
1. At the high level, at the overall context level, the allegedly sophisticated view projected by the powers that be, is that "there's no real, constant, solid truth", that everything is just the ever-changing perception of the strongest killer around, and whoever can project their perception the strongest, that is, those with the most power to destroy, starve, maim, and kill, must be the ones who really know the truth. In terms of the way this bioecosystem is actually structured, this has nothing to do with reality, but this "no-real-truth" imbecility is the projection oozing from every pore of academia, the foundations, the media, entertainment, corporate life, and everywhere else that the corporate and financial vipers can get their filthy hands on.
2. Everyone operates on the idea (necessarily, by the nature of being human) that they're supposed to know what's true. When a person says they think something to be true, they're supposed to look like they know what they're talking about. But if you actually let on that you actually think what you're saying is accurate, you are informed, by subtle but extremely powerful, life-threatening conversational conventions that you are some sort of arrogant, egotistical, pompous fool, who ought to be a humble, humility-filled person, because there really is no real truth to begin with.
Thus:
1. Operate on the basis of actual reality; there is no "real" reality (high level context).
2. Speak the truth, but remember, you will be superseded by whoever has the power to starve you out, or starve out those you're talking to, so you better not actually count on knowing anything (low level instructions).
3. You can't leave the field, because the deranged, laughing imbeciles who run the corporations, control finance, employment, distribution of merchandise for small business, the entire media and entertainment industry including what everyone talks about every day (social life), publishing, most professional contracts, academia, medicine, the law, and just about every other aspect of daily life for almost everyone. So you can't leave the field; it's everywhere.
4. You can't really discuss this matter of truth in the context of everyday discussion, because everyone's so scared of being exposed as a bullshit artist, that they'll go to any means to stop you, including accusing you of being "philosophical" (meaning nothing is concrete), or a bore, or driving people crazy, or being cult-like, or playing word games, or some such. In fact, you could wind up getting so isolated that you "fall-out-of-the-loop", and then things can get really crazy. So this whole matter of singular-truth/no-real-truth remains effectively undiscussed in the general popular discourse.
5. This dynamic goes on and on - it pervades everything from the early teenage years on to old age - at school, at work, in families, in professional life, in media, in entertainment - for most people, everywhere, unbroken.
Again:
1. Know reality; there is no reality;
The effect is to leave the population in a constant state of bewilderment, uncertainty, unsure of the value of anything, no clues as to the value of their work, their skills, their time, their mind, their sexuality, or anything else, unable to tell context from content, unable to tell the truth of even the simplest political, social, medical, or any other life and death issues; not really understanding the "terrain" of life, easily manipulated, and especially for the most oppressed (the vast majority of the world) in a constant state of being ripped-off, stripped-down, and, of primary importance, self-blaming to boot.
In short, that whole dynamic stops, blocks, everyone from accurately figuring out anything, leaving just about everyone in a state of "believing" or "believing in" and following whichever threatening leader, high and low, that offers not to hurt them and offers some morsel of local protection. Leaves everyone in a state of bewilderment, glued-up cognition, and cluelessness especially regarding the basic issues of overall life survival.
Now I ask you, is that an archetype case of "The Double Bind" as discovered by Bateson et al. The schizophrenia-producing, uncertainty-producing, rage-producing, toxin-producing, self-destructive - on the grand scale - producing 'double bind'? "Know-the-truth/can't-know-the-truth", "speak-the-truth/there's-no-truth-to-speak" . . . quite an insanity producing mess.
And that's not all. There are other insanely preposterous "high level, contextual absurdities" that are enforced with equality disastrous and large-scale suicidal results.
Combing that out, and curing those society-wide and world-wide "double-binds" is where that theory should have gone forty years ago, and where it should go now. But you can bet your sweet life that neither The Rockefeller Foundation, nor anyone else connected to those imbeciles who run the world of finance and the corporations would allow one thin dime towards that sort of research.
Unless they could co-opt it of course, in the service of making the situation worse. Only under those circumstances, of course, would they weigh in with big bucks. Of course.
Oh well. Onward.
--- Neil R. Miller, August 6th, 1997
Further notes on this matter - August 29th, 1997 -
Thinking about it all after completing a rereading of this book - thinking about the "Double Bind" and the origins of schizophrenia - and putting together what I've read from Piaget, Lorenz, Russell, Bowlby, Kuhn, Sullivan, Singer, Metcalf, as well as Bateson, Watzlawick, Haley, Sluzki, and many others including my own work in Chapters 4 and 6 of the "Paradigm", I would summarize the causes of schizophrenia as follows:
The ability to understand the distinction between 'one-individual-element-among-many-elements-within-a-system'; understanding the distinction between that and "a unified system of things", is a basic ability that every human being has, and that develops, physiologically, that is, that "grows in", slowly, from the genetic code, at around the age of seven.
This ability, to understand context, to develop an understanding of an entire system of things, as different from individual things within a system, is basic to the operations of every older child and adult.
This distinction, between grasping and operating within a whole governing system, and simply seeing a single thing within a system, is a distinction that everyone makes, however unconsciously, although very few people seem to be conscious of this crucial distinction, or able to articulate just what that distinction is.
At any rate, the ability to make such a distinction - again, between a whole system of operation, and a single thing within a system - does come on line, neurologically, at about the age of seven.
Like many other 'mechanisms' in the body, notably for example, the attachment mechanism (which first strongly develops at about the age of two), like many other such bodily mechanisms, there is what is called "a sensitive period", during which time the child first learns to use the newfound ability.
Regarding the logical levels "mechanism", during the first years of its development, it is important that there be some sort of specific behavioral context presented to a child - a system of consistent, I'll repeat that, a system of consistant and clearly defined rules, a setting that makes sense, a consistent context for the child to operate within.
If, during the "sensitive period" regarding the development of an understanding of context, the child has a consistent overall context to operate within, he or she develops the ability to grasp and understand context, to grasp and understand overall rules, and the like.
This doesn't mean that he or she will forever be "locked into" whatever specific set of rules are operating in childhood - far from it. It only means that the child will thereafter be able to easily understand context, and in fact, will not be overly confused when rules and contexts change, later in life.
However, if, during that "sensitive period" for first learning about context - say from about the age of six to about the age of nine - if through that several year period, the child is constantly forbidden from understanding the system he or she is supposed to behave within, if during that time, no matter what he or she does, they're wrong, no matter what he tries, he is punished, each time he thinks he understands what he's supposed to do, he's slapped down, then his ability to understand context altogether is damaged, is harmed.
Thenceforward, into adulthood, he may well be able to adjust to a particular context, if there is great consistency, but should that context change, i.e. loss of an attachment figure, the breakup of a relationship, a change of job, a change of city, a national political change, a change of climate of various sorts, a change of culture, then, the person is at high risk for a "schizophrenic episode", "an inability to understand the new context". That is, the person will experience an "episode" of inability to understand the overall context within which they are living.
If the child did not, during the few years of "sensitive period" for learning about context, if the child was not given a consistent overall context for their behavior and their life at that time, then the child and adult, will, forever after, have far more difficulty grasping context altogether, particularly in times of change and stress.
So, why would parents fail to present a constant context for a child to live within? For one thing, their own lives may be fraught with inconsistency and uncertainty. For another thing, they may be living some sort of "double life"; living outwardly one way - honest and upstanding - and in reality another way, deceitful and criminal. Perhaps overtly according to one moral code, and covertly according to another. Perhaps there is a secrecy problem regarding political repression, or regarding survival in the world of corporate or financial duplicity. Perhaps there is some sort of constant emotional turmoil such that no one ever knows "which end is up", so to speak. There are lots of conditions that can breed the sort of inconsistency for a child, such that the condition known as "schizophrenia" can develop.
Again, some amount of inconsistency and confusion in childhood can turn out to be a helpful thing. After all, it is often pointed out that, some ability to "step outside" the current context of one's circumstance can, under some limited circumstances, lead to the greatest large-scale discoveries in science, art, medicine, and even politics.
But But, BUT, acute schizophrenia is a serious, life-damaging and life-threatening illness. Indeed, especially in a society that is constantly looking for "losers" and scapegoats, especially in a society that is constantly deceitful, such an "episode" is likely to lead to ever escalating changes of context, and escalating confusion and misunderstanding, all the way to further life-threatening events, and even to suicide. The severe problem of the development and the effects of this difficulty is not to be taken lightly.
(c) nrm 8/97
. . . Again, onward.
(book read: August, 1997; annotation written: March 7, 1998; appended 3/15/98)
Back in '84, when we wrote the first volume of "Paradigm from California", included in it (Chapter 6: "Personality Complementarity") was what we had figured out was, the basic different personalities between people. We sorted out just what "personality" difference was all about (different ways of getting protection), and where it came from in childhood, why pre-humans needed personality differences in the first place, that is, why it evolved that there were such differences, and what the function was, in nature for there to be such differences, that is, what otherwise insurmountable human problems were solved by there being personality differences. In those formulations, but of only tangential relevance to that particular illumination, we realized that one of the personalities we uncovered was found more often in women and another of them was found more often in men.
But even so, there was some other difference between gals and guys, besides some personality things, something that I felt very strongly was there, and that I was sure had some important function in nature, but that I never could never figure out what it was exactly. It kind of irked me for years.
As far back as background class in the late 1970's, I had been running, as a routine three-day riff every term, a discussion of the matter of the difference between the girls and the boys, in the form of drawing two columns on the blackboard; one column labeled "Feminine", and the other column labeled "Masculine", asking the kids to fill in the columns, putting complementary characteristics on each side.
On the outside of each of those two columns labeled "Feminine" and "Masculine", there were two more columns labeled "advantages" and "disadvantages" (with a seventh column for "uncertainty" about whether the characteristic was gender specific, or whether a consequence was an advantage or a disadvantage - but that's another matter . . .).
Although those "Background Class" "Conversations" (the kids were mostly between 13 and 16 years old; it was a big city, 2,000 person public school, 2 hours. and 25 kids per class); although those classroom conversations invariably became quite lively, and often quite heated as well (understatement), and although we were able to advance the conversations term after term - me throwing out things from previous terms, and the kids then coming up with characterizations that were more and more sophisticated, more and more comprehensive, and more and more well-defined, term after term after term, like everything else in those golden classes - and although we meticulously transcribed all the board notes, with Deanna carefully classifying and binding years and years of them into "the Big Books" (they were available, and entirely useful, years later when writing the paradigm) . . . I still . . . well . . . basically . . . sort of, never did quite figure out what the difference was exactly, between boys and girls. I mean, really, in nature. That I could specifically articulate anyway.
Well, maybe I'm just thick. I mean, there was not the slightest doubt in my mind that there was this huge gigantic difference between girls and boys, between female and male specifically; but I just couldn't figure out what it was exactly.
Then, a couple of years ago, when I was corresponding with a 'stop violence against women' internet mailing list (which inspired me to write the '22 Books' group of reviews, the Beyond The Wave paper, and about a hundred other little essay/posts on violence against women), a woman named Ellen, who provided my primary guidance on that list, mentioned something she'd read about differences in some sort of communicative CNS 'wiring' that had been identified between men and women - the way she put it was a little vague - but anything that particular girl wrote always turned my mind almost luminescent.
(Unfortunately, that mailing list was systematically destroyed by female agents provocateurs purporting to be 'feminists' - an all too common problem when dealing with women's issues altogether - so that conversation, and all others in that forum were rudely, abruptly, and permanently terminated.)
But still and all, that remark by Ellen about possible 'wiring' differences, like everything else she wrote, stayed with me; it more or less reawakened my mind to this issue. Even so though, it was only a wisp of a possible clue.
So anyway, when I saw this book, Brownmiller's "Femininity" at Aardvark Books last spring, one quick look at the chapter titles (wonderful definition, I love it), the writing style (easy, entertaining, information-rich), and the author's name (writer of "Against Our Will", which I've seen in virtually every special violence bibliography, which has been sitting on my shelf for about ten years, but which I have never read) I instantly decided that I had to read Susan's book on 'femininity'.
I remember when I was reading it, I thought to myself that a woman might find it an entirely boring book, just a statement of the obvious, but to me, I found it incredibly fascinating and enlightening, and it keeps coming to mind. (I also read Joan Brumberg's "The Body Project" a couple of months later, another direct hit; another dizzying [for me] look at the same issue.) Anyway, now, six months later, I think I've finally figured out the long-fabled difference between da girlz and da boyz.
I mean, it would take probably a couple of hundred hours of conversation to really get it down, and maybe a half a chapter to write it up, but, in a word (so to speak), I think the difference has something to do with the converting of the "raw materials" of nature into higher level things, into things of special value to humans, i.e. Shelter, art supplies, food, talk, clothing, etc.
Maybe something like a "two-stage" process; first, the lower level stage, initial carving out and forming, and then the second stage, the higher level process, the final shaping and meshing with the world.
Perhaps there are things, "wiring", in the "masculine" central nervous system that are more suited to the former stage, the initial, low level part, and things in the "feminine" central nervous system that are more suited to the latter, the shaping and intermeshing. I know that's vague and gross as it stands, but I think something vaguely like that is going to turn out to be the case, at some definitive higher level than the way I'm putting it now.
So the way I've put it here definately is Not to be taken literally, as an everyday matter - in the current form of the idea, it's obviously not that simple. And then besides that, also, in my experience, things in nature, especially processes, only very rarely come in two's; the general, and very reliable rule that I've figured out is, "It Takes At Least Three To Make A System". So obviously it would take a certain amount of figuring and work for me to figure out exactly what it is I'm trying to say, including why it matters, and the solution always , of course, being in the context of solving some pressing, large scale, generalized, otherwise unsolved human problem.
For example, I betcha that the era could be rewritten, so as to accomplish exactly what it was originally designed to accomplish, and more, and written simply and clearly in even almost fewer words, and written in such a way that no one could argue with it. Maybe like a definition that, sort of, arches back on itself somewhere, no loopholes, all locked up; maybe sort of like the solution to Fermat's Last Theorem, or something, but different. Maybe it could be done in just a few thousand hours of person-figuring . . . Well, it seems that way to me anyway, just for an example . . .
For another example, I remember back during the Thomas confirmation hearings thinking that Anita Hill would probably make a much better justice than Clarance Thomas, and it occurred to me. that even in many of the most patriarchal societies, it seems that the symbolism for "justice", the "face" of justice is so often female. Depending on what an accurate, a scientifically accurate illumination of the difference between female and male turns out to be, I wonder if the most reasonable division of government might be a male executive, a male President, administrating the major day to day decisions and absorbing the major external heat, a female Supreme Court, in council, determining ultimate right and wrong, and a 50/50 legislature, writing the rules. I remember being a bit disappointed when Mr. Clinton appointed his first male justice (understandable given the current Republican Party pressures, and of course, the supression of a provable paradigm to work from), but anyway, I remember thinking nine female justices for the Supreme Court, well, eight or nine say, might well be in line with what evolution - nature - has developed. But of course, all that would be pending some very accurate-to-singular-reality findings and distinctions. Oh well . . .
So, anyway, while I don't recall Brownmiller (or Brumberg) saying anything like that specifically, still and all, it is definitely in the context of thinking about her book, that the above distinction has occurred to me. And I'm pretty sure that this difference of "process", or "presentation", or "stage-of-value", or something, somewhere like that, somehow, is going to figure in centrally to the finished conclusion, should that ever come.
So anyway, thank you Susan Brownmiller.
Ever since I first heard Michael Parenti speak, about seven or eight years ago, I thought him to be the very finest political analyst I've heard in decades; no one else is even close. But for some reason, I hadn't read his books, I'm not sure why. Anyway, when I saw this title, I grabbed it immediately, and, sure enough, it is the best and clearest brief rendition of what has happened in the former Soviet Union and Eastern Europe that I have ever seen. His writing style is superb, and his command of highly relevant information and his organization of it is excellent. More to the point perhaps, his analysis of the situation is very directly on target.
My differences with Parenti, as I see it anyway, are in regard to areas of information, rather than understandings about right and wrong (ideology). He has a better command of vast political information and a far better writing style than I, and, he has at least some access to the general public. What's lacking though, and this is tragically true throughout the known left, is a clear understanding of why people act the way they do, as regards basic human structure, which is the ground I've covered. I don't mean to criticize Dr. Parenti though; he is, by far, the clearest and most directly accurate of all the dozen or so current political speakers that I've heard of.
At any rate, this book, "Blackshirts and Reds" is an excellent book; short, easy to read, and very very highly recommended.
A further note from one year later . . .Sept., '98
One of the things that makes this book fascinating, is that the model of Barcolena, 1936, was well described - a great feeling of revoluionary fervor sweeping the people, the whole people spontaniously rising up to defeat the Fascists, being victorious and spontaneously reorganizing the factories, offices and workplaces along communist lines. The problem, as I see it, is that this was taken as one of the great models of revolutionary change, and persists as a model for progressive change, to this day.
For years, even decades afterwards, that's what a lot of people thought is the way revolution is supposed ot happen. But alas, that model turned out to be impractical, even, hard to say it, deadly fatal. The idea that people join the progressive side, because of a great spirit, because everyone's doing it, because it feels right, because the time is right, because they trust the right people, and can spot the right rhetoric, and so forth, will, in my opinion, necessarily lead to disaster.
As I've described in detail, again and again in all my papers, what I think is workable, permenantly, is focusing on people learning to figure out, and figuring out, that is, assembling many factors to figure out, what is accurate, and who is discussing and arguing honestly in detail, and what is inaccurate and who is arguing dishonestly in detail. Very very different from simply knowing who is on your side, knowing who to trust and trusting them, spotting the right rhetoric, and arguing reactively because it feels so right.
Worse still, secrecy, human-harming battle, reactive arguement, rhetoric, and the drowing out of careful, articulate, and comprehensive figuring, on the part of ordinary people, are counter-forces to progressive change. It is certainly true that the fascists (and capitalists generally) force many of those things on people who are fighting for cooperative change, via repression, terror, starvation, seige, and all the rest - but the reason that the right-wing attacks in that way is not merely to physically take power, but, far more important, because reaction in kind creates a general reactionary frame-of-mind among people generally.
I certainly remember the "spirit-of-Barcolena" as very much present in many of my experiences of the 60's, and how magnificantly sweet it is, but at this point, it is rather painful to bear in mind - in Spain as in so many other places around the world - that a movement that primarily creates and rides that "Wave" is so terribly bound to crash into oblivion and worse. But all and all, I must say, I enjoyed this little book, even despite the fact that I know what's on the other side of it . . .
Unfortunately, upon reading the book, it did turn out that I don't know enough to understand a lot of the basic high level math concepts that he mentions - although I do suspect that it might not be that far beyond a college or even a high school kid who was adept at the subject, although I don't really know. But anyway, without me being able to understand a lot of the low-level details, much of this book went over my head, but it did give some clues from mathematics about how you string together a lot of very diverse things, weed them out, comb them out, discover some new things, become desperately despairing, and completely ignored, and finally (sometimes after - literaly - hundreds of years of effort) put it all together into a solution. And, sure enough, there were some things about the process reported in the book that did indeed very much remind me of what I went through when I was working on Paradigm, Vol. I.
I actually did find this book useful, even though I didn't understand a lot of it, but I'll bet there is a way to comb out high level math, crystal clear, for the mathematically unschooled reader. A lot of authors make that promise, but I myself haven't seen it done yet. The author would have to know a lot about politics, and what people really want, and, of course, why it matters, humanly speaking. And, as is well known, those subjects are basically taboo in the world of corporate and most academic science.
Anyway, I did find this book basically well written, with some fascinating personal history regarding various mathematicians over the centuries, and somewhat illuminative of solving processes.
I don't read much fiction, so sometimes, when I do, I don't really know quite what to make of what I'm reading. With this book, I started crying almost as soon as I started reading it, and more and more as the story went on. By the time I neared the end, I was sobbing uncontrollably, so much so that I could barely associate the last few pages, I really don't know why. So anyway, therefore, I presume this must be a very good book.
This is a very short, and very pretty story about a sister, Morning Girl, and her brother, Star Boy, and their life among their family in the Bahamas, in the months before Columbus arrives.
This is a very brief, simple story set in Michigan or Indiana of the 1840's, about Native Americans, in this case, the Potawatomis, being driven from their homeland, and a young settler who is caught up in the forced march.
This is a fictional story about a Seminole girl who has gone to elementary school near the Kennedy Space Center and, dreaming of space travel and other planets, is sent by her tribe on a long journey alone through the great Florida swamplands. Surviving by her tribal lore, and her friendships with the animals, and her conversations with them, she realizes that planet earth is the real point. It reads almost a little like 'Island of the Blue Dolphins', except a bit more fantastic, and without the tragedy.
In the first half of this book, it seemed to me that Walkerdine makes clear that she understands herself to be in a conversation with "post-modernist" (no-real-truth) writers. It seems like she's trying to show that something can be accomplished by research, while using the "nothing-can-be-accomplished" general framework to argue her point. (!!!) I thought she might know something, but through the whole first half, she spends an awful lot of her energy defending herself against the "you-can't-really-know-anything-anyway" type of critic.
Anyway, Walkerdine's concern in this book is the fact that British working class female children find themselves aspiring to 'rise-up' to become successful middle class persons and are led to do so via the route of becoming sexually alluring. She focuses on how, very young girls, especially 5 to 9 year olds, absorb the "lessons" projected by movies, pop music, and advertising. The problem for me is, it is hard for me to pin down just what she's saying those lessons are. In this kind of writing, everything is presented with such deliberate 'ambiguity'; a few convoluted sentences floating about, and then a declarative sentence with a hip 'radical' idea in it, which I think is supposed to wake the reader up and make them think that the previous sentences must be very "deep". I'm sorry, but I think that whole writing style - not just her, she's probably the best of the lot - but I think that that whole type of writing is basically not "deep" at all, or anything else like that. In fact, I think it's a scam, and not an intellectual scam, no no, rather, an extremely anti-intellectual scam at that.
Probably the most useful thing in the book is her first hand reports of daily life scenes that she recorded from the daily lives of children interacting with their families, and her observations of their hopes and difficulties. In that regard, a main focus for her seems to be British working-class/middle-class differences, although I can't figure what commentary she is making about those differences.
The problem I have with it is that she doesn't seem to have any idea of what would be a positive alternative type of life - that's certainly the vaguest thing in the whole book - and thus, her research doesn't seem to have any clear goal beyond a kind of unfocused analysis. I'm not sure really, but I think the field from which she hails is called "post-modern" sociology, or something like that, but Walkerdine herself seems to be attempting to rise above it, although I'm not really sure. The difficulty is that the entire field itself seem designed to discredit intellectual thinking, rather than further it.
It's sort of what the Republican Party and the right-wing does with politics - they operate as deliberately corruptly as possible, in order to discredit all public government. Just as the corrupt Republicans constantly hammer away at the preposterous idea that everyone's corrupt, in order to justify their own, and their puppeteer's corruption, so the "post-modernists" present an ungrounded, convoluted, impenetrable framework, specifically in order to make it appear that intellect itself is that way. I understand the entire 'post-modernist', 'no-real-truth' scam as part and parcel of the ferocious right-wing assault on anyone's ability to sort things out. The whole field operates as a horrible, deliberate, and tragic trap for far too many otherwise intelligent people.
Anyway, I did very much like the fact that throughout, Walkerdine reports information about her own background, almost as an additional case history, and I do get the feeling that she is trying to do something useful, but the constraints of that "no real-truth", "no real goal" context are a huge barrier.
The last part of the book, which I'd hoped would contain a 'punchline' of some sort, in fact seemed to dwell on some, to my mind, wholly inaccurate concepts of the old Freudian genre. "Innocence" is seen as something unadult; fantasies are seen as something one pops out of the womb with, and the intrapsychic (rather than the interactional) is seen as far more governing than it is. "Oedipus" appears on almost every page of the last part of the book, a concept which I've long since learned is a rather cynically ridiculous idea. Certainly children become properly enraged at an unwarrented loss of protection, and may gravitate their affection towards one parent or the other, depending on where they can best find reasonable protection. But, to then suggest that such matters are grounded in some sort of innate sexual seduction - the "they're asking for it" school of child abuse defense - is entirely untrue, and, to put it mildly, unhelpful. It it to the author's credit that she does make reference to this objection, but she dismisses it - I don't.
Generally speaking I must say I do not find writing within this sort of framework real useful, although in the case of this book, some of the literal reports of daily life that appear about halfway though, and the author's reports of her own experience and views describing her life when she was growing up as an 'upwardly' aspiring "working class" kid, were informative.
((c) nrm November 13, 1997)
(11/13/97) When I saw this book it seemed to have a lot of elements that draw me in - revolutionary times in China of the 1920's, Chungking of the old world as seen through the eyes of a stout country boy; the 1933 Newbery award . . . and sure enough, it lived up to its promise
This book is about China - sort of 'between the old and the new'. The streets of Chunking in the 1920's - the old order overthrown, and the new one not yet established. Corruption, impoverishment, banditry, and desperation are rampant - amidst amazing changes to a never-before-seen, modern world. The murderous, thieving armies of rival warlords are everywhere, looting, killing, almost at random; and there is a modern, capitalist government also rivaling for power. And, almost unmentioned in this book, but well known to me, there is a communist revolutionary Eighth Route Army silently assembling its Long March deep in the mountains - and no one knows how they might shake the world . . .
Young Fu is a stout young country boy, barely in his teens, son of a farmer, a peasant, who died of the heartbreak of Chinese country life. Now, the boy is recommended for an apprenticeship with a coppersmith, a Mr. Tung at a fine brassworks in the distant and fabled city of Chunking, and his mother and he come to live there, and survive as best they can.
And survive they do. His mother is vigiliant at always paying respects, and homage, to the gods at their shrines, while carefully keeping to the old ways of thinking. She gets a job making brooms and is an excellent personal and directional source of protection for her son. Tang, the coppersmith, is also a gem of an employer, fair, just, very hardworking, with a keen and appreciative eye for diligence, integrity, and skill. The boy also meets an old scholar, who teaches him to read and write, and Young Fu has good memory of his warm and hard-working father as well, who became a broken man from the trauma of military pillage and famine that was then rife throughout the countryside.
While Fu experiences the full danger and corruption of the big city, his good fortune regarding the important figures in his life allow him to traverse the dangerous and slippery twists and turns of life in the big city, and become a full fledged journeyman. It is much to his credit, that he makes excellent use of the situation that he is afforded, and treats helpful people with the full respect they should be accorded. All around, he's a hardworking, lucky fellow, and he makes the most of it.
I also find it kind of interesting that this book won the 1933 Newbury. That was the year, of course, that America was itself in the depths of depression and gangsterism, and the year that Franklin Delano Roosevelt and New Deal came into power. The difference between a Horacio Alger in an American tale and a Young Fu in a Chinese tale, is that the writer about China makes no pretense of the main character "picking himself up by his bootstraps", or anything silly like that. In this story about a Chinese youth, it is the integrity of his attachment figures, as well as his own integrity, that is the make or break. Of course, that part appeals to me, and I think it is a much more realistic approach. Refreshing indeed.
Again, fiction is new to me altogether, and, again, I'm not sure what to make of it sometimes. Here is a new catagory altogether, which for want of a better term I'll call "fantasy-based fiction". I guess that means stories about things that could never happen in real life - fifty foot giants walking around in the night, gobbling little children like popcorn. But the little girl in this book, her named is Sophie, and her pal as well, the BFG, are so very charming, that it is kind of fun to read. I just can't tell. Well, maybe there a bit too much violence for my tastes . . . but with this kind of book, I'm just not sure . . .
This book is about how the corporate/U.S. policy makers, through the "School of the Americas" trained tens of thousands of Latin Americans to murder, via unspeakable torture, the best and the brightest of the last couple of generations of Latin American youth, intellectuals, and popular leaders and common folk. The approach does not break any new ground, but it does give a good review of some of what is known on the subject. Recommended reading.
I think I should say that although I applaud the availability of this book, and I do recommend it, there are a couple of problems that I have with this approach. One is that almost all the emphasis regarding perpetrators is on the US government, the US military, and the Latin American military. While certainly they have been the instruments of torture and mass murder, really, they are the front men for the large corporations and finance capital generally. Like in any other area of crime, to place so much emphasis on the government front men as the cause, rather than their high level backers as the cause, leads, in people's minds, however subtly, to the discrediting of the idea public government altogether. That is designed to lead the way to the destruction of public government altogether, and to the ascension of private hidden corporate government, the ugliest of all possible continuations. In my view, this understanding must always be present, front and center, in books such as this.
Second, the author admirably makes note of the fact that, while the Vietnamese, and we, were successful at expelling the capitalist armies from Vietnam, in the end, the corporations developed far more insidious, and deathly methods of destroying third world peoples, namely "low intensity warfare", "death squads", and the like. He does not (nor does anyone else besides me) approach the interactive dynamics among the population at large which allows people to dishonestly claim that they don't know about these things and are not part of it. A careful reading of Goldenhagan's "Hitler's Willing Executioners" gives some clues about how this worked in another country in an earlier part of this century. What books like this leave out is that that social dynamic that allowed the Germans to claim to "not know" (dishonestly claim to not see, "notsee") is very much present in the here and now regarding the American relationship to Latin America, as well as issues right next door (rape, race, poverty, and all the rest of it). There are everyday, "conversational conventions", social mores and patterns, that enforce dishonesty, and disallow overt conversation regarding what, like in Nazi Germany, everyone knows full well. There are many bourgeoise "conversational conversations" that are specifically designed to make it easy for people to be able to claim that they do not see what they see perfectly well.
I hate to say it, but I've been reading little books like this for almost forty years, since I was a little kid, about Greece and Italy in the forties, about Iran and Guatemala in the fifties, about Brazil, Indonesia, Uruguay, and of course about Vietnam in the sixties, and by the truckload in the seventies, eighties, and nineties. It's great to produce the important information like this book, but, obviously, there's something distrastously missing in the whole conversation, including all through the progressive populations, and has been for a long time. I do believe that that is what my work addresses. (See Schema, Summary, Home Page, Integrity Rules, Conversational Conventions, Components, Beyond the Wave, and all the rest.)
Third, there is the matter of this idea of "forgiveness" and other such "religious" (anti-religious) type concepts. Frankly, I never could understand what this word "forgiveness" means, and I get the feeling no one else understands what it means either. Usually, it's put in terms of "either forgive, or, revenge and punishment". But in fact, that's all part and parcel of the same system.
The way I see it, there's no forgiveness and no forgetting. If someone changes their mode of operation to operate in a work out well all around way, then they become just like anyone else. If they choose to continue to operate in the deceitful and deadly "one against the other" "you lose, I win" frame of operations, they must be "quarantined" (Alice Vachss' term from "Sex Crimes"; see review elsewhere at this site), or at least placed in a low-power enough position where they can't hurt anyone. No vengeance, no forgiving, no punishment, and no forgetting, of anything, ever. Never.
Either a person operates in a helpful way, in which case they are integrated into society, or they operate in a harmful way, in which case they are quarantined or otherwise placed out of reach of harming others. No forgiving, ever, whatever the hell that means anyway. I get the feeling that the "forgiving" concept comes from the idea that the whole "forgiving" idea comes from the preposterous idea that people can't change their mode of behavior, so they're just supposed to say they're sorry, and get a little better, a little more deceitful, at their deadly activities. "Inevitable evil", "people can't really change", so we better just have them mouth "I'm sorry" platitudes, make 'em pay for the crime (prepostrous), "put it all behind us", and all that bullshit, and leave it at that. "Church of satin" is what that stuff is, as far as I can tell. The disappeared will never go away! That's a basic rule of life, as far as I can tell.
Never forgive; never forget; never vengence; never punish. Society for those operating in a work out well all around framework, some form of major quarantine for those operating in a "you lose, I win" frame of mind. "But, but, what about . . . Eternal Evil?" Bullshit. The church of satan; that's what that is, and it's total bullshit. Again, see the papers above, and especially the "Origins of the Commonly Understood Framework" section of the Summary paper on that. (Also, an entire chapter of the paradigm proper - "Chapter Twelve, 'Farming Society'" (tragically unpublished) is devoted to this subject.) So anyway, I have concluded that the whole "forgiveness" framework is not accurate to solving our problems, and is extremely unhelpful to put it mildly.
Finally, the fourth problem I have with the general approach people often take to fighting against the operations like the "School of Assassins" is a lack of taking into account of what is lost in these Holocausts - be it towards Armenia and the European working class in WWI, or the German murder of Europe's Jews and other indigenous and intellectual peoples, or towards Africa, or Latin America, or Bosnia, or anywhere else. People think of the tragedy and losses as what happens to the people getting tortured and killed. That's a tenth of it. Bigger still is what happens to the immediate people left alive. Bigger than that even, even a bigger loss, the biggest loss of all, is what happens to the entire society, for generations to come, and indeed, the whole world around and everyone in it. That's not an abstract idea. Nothing abstract about it.
(In process, (c) nrm November 16, 1997, 11 am pst)
Well, having said all that, this book is a generally helpful exposition of the matter of US corporate engineering, via CIA and army, of torture and murder throughout Latin America and I do recommend it.
This is the sequel to Thomas' 'Lives of a Cell'. I decided to reread it as, like Bowlby's work and that of a few others, I find that the general framework within which he writes is extraordinarily helpful in organizing my mind.
I picked this up because it was highly recommended to me by the person who works in the children's section of a local bookstore. It also sort of dawned on me that Katherine Paterson has written some other stuff I liked, so I was looking forward to reading it.
As it turns out, this is a very very nice little story; I liked it lots and lots. It's about a kid being shuffled, sort of, through a foster home in Virginia. When I finished it, I read the tiny author's biography in the back. Katherine Paterson was born in, and was raised for part of her childhood in China and later spent several years teaching in Japan. Somehow, somehow or other, it shows. She's really a very good writer.
Note: What follows is me blabbing for about 1500+ words regarding what reading this book makes me think of. To skip to the next listing, click here.
November 22, 1997
Reading through the first part took some teeth grinding, as it seemed to be written without much clear purpose that I could discern (maybe I just wasn't used to their writing style yet). Then, the next 30 pages or so seemed to be the usual "perception soup" - analysis floating in space, so to speak. But then I realized that that was just the general literature review, written in the framework that too too many books about prostitution and international economics are written in. In "Night Market", the authors review others' materials within the framework that those other materials were written in; so that's why it was such a bore. Ok, fair enough.
But now, I'm about a third of the way through the book, and in fact it's turning out to be an excellent study. I remember back in '64, entering the New York World's Fair in Queens and seeing a huge sign - "Peace Through Understanding".
At the time, I was immersed in reading about the growing war in Indochina, and I thought that the slogan was rather absurd - war doesn't come from misunderstanding culture, or language, nor anything else like that. It comes from finance capital stealing resources helter skelter worldwide, and killing - indeed, slaughtering by the millions - anyone and everyone that tries to stop them - pure and simple.
What I didn't realize at the time though, was that the idea of the slogan - "peace through understanding" - was an advance forewarning of the creation of an international army of civilian rapists who would serve as a backup army for destroying the resistance of colonial populations, should the traditional colonial hot-war operations somehow fail.
This "tourism" planning stuff has been going on since the fifties, and Bishop's and Robinson's book give an excellent, if brief overview of how international, mainly western, finance capital has been preparing the groundwork for the wholesale, literal rape of third world cultures, since before the Vietnam war.
They mention McNamara's trip to Thailand, as President of the World Bank (Stank) in 1971 as the clarion call for the conversion of tourism from "seeing the sights" into massive gang rape. McNamara had, as secretary of defense, overseen the groundbreaking U-Dorn conversion of millennia old local culture into a massive U.S. army brothel culture, so it was a simple, and, for him, natural matter to again effect another conversion - this time from R&R ("rest and 'recreation'" for marauding army troops) to S&S ("sun and sin" for their planet-destroying corporate employers) - S&S, as the "new 'tourist' order" came to be known. Anyway, the chapter of "Night Market" entitled "Languages of Tourism" gives a much needed picture of what so much of the boom in third world tourism is really all about.
Back around 1978 or so, I was avidly reading two excellent publications, both now long gone: one was "Pacific Research and World Empire Report", and the other was called "South-East Asia Chronicle". I used to spend several days, each term with my high school classes, passing out articles on "Palm Oil", and "SE Asia Electronics Workers", reading them in class, and discussing the implications regarding "popular culture" and advertising right here in river city.
Both publications, were concerned principally with Indonesia, The Philippines, Thailand, The Pacific Peoples, Korea, and the various environs of that part of the world. Those publications chronicled the takeover and 'buy'-outs by U.S. led transnationals, of the best rural lands that had been tilled by indigenous people for generations, centuries, even millennia, and the conversion of the land to Palm Oil plantations, in effect, to Palm Oil factories.
The local people were driven away, crowded onto much poorer lands, and herded into refugee status. The young girls, now displaced along with their families, were then lured, indeed, herded into the cities with promise of new, modern, money-making jobs.
The jobs, as it turned out, were for the US high-tech electronics industry. For quarters per hour, six days a week, these girls would sit, bent over an eye-infection producing microscope, perfectly painting those beloved circuits for our watches, our calculators, our nuclear missiles, and later our precious home computers (including, of course, the one I'm typing on right now, built by I know who). And, most significant here, part of their workday would consist of being a rapt audience for the various cosmetics vendors that would wander the shop floor, advertising and peddling their wares.
By their mid-teenage years, they'd become used to living in alienated dormotories, they were almost blind, they'd become no longer useful at the microscopes, but were now fully dependent on at least a paltry money-income for barest survival. Furthermore, their families back uplands had come to depend on the few dollars that the girls had been able to save and send home, as the girls themselves were dependent on the self-respect that being able to send a few dollars home brought.
At that point, rural girls suddenly jobless in the big city and practically blind, they'd be led into the brothels, by the hundreds of thousands. Surprise. No surprise. It seemed to me that that whole sequence, start to finish, had always been the organized, integrated, well-planned-out "development" strategy, right from the start.
McNamara - a fine specimen of a protégé of The Henry 'Heil Hitler' Ford Motor Company - seeing that the traditional Napalm and Holocaust (5 million Vietnamese killed) methods for extracting wealth from the third world, were no longer entirely reliable, switched to a strategy of digging into the rural population, clearing away their age-old farmland, rendering the local people into refugees, isolating various sectors, and then, raping the entire teenage population en mass, and in that way, suppressing all possible anti-bourgeois dissent.
What does happen to the population at large, intellectually and emotionally? What happens with their brothers, their boyfriends, their childhood pals, their mothers, their fathers, their cousins their schoolmates? What happens when you break the loves of their lives in this manner? Not to mention what happens with what was, in many ways, still, at least reminiscent of the original matrifocal cultures?
My guess is, massive self-disrespect among the population left behind, a viciously brutal and reactive anger, a pervasive and powerful sense of thoroughly deadening internal loss, a massive hopelessness about what matters in life, lots of depression, lots of suicide, lots of internal pain that can only barely be stemmed by alcohol, opium and heroin, and most important, a total cluelessness about what to do, or even which end is up.
And it gets worse. With few young women left in the countryside, the main sexual outlet for many is the brothels - and that deepens the picture. A famous 19th century American Robber Baron once said "I can get half the working class to kill the other half any time I want!" He was of course referring to his employment of agents provocateurs, scabs, detective agency thugs, cops on the street, company unions, corrupt leaders, and the like.
But essentially, the old British idea of getting one portion of the population to fight the other, getting them to bludgeon one another half to death, and then primly walking in and taking over control of the now severely weakened, even shattered local structures, is, I think, a première, classic strategy of modern capitalism the whole world over.
In the case at hand - perhaps in Thailand as an archetype, but not only in Thailand - it's done by "getting one half of the population to rape the other half" (or at least a large, decisive portion thereof), therein destroying the internal certainty, sense of history, destroying their caretaking, destroying their maps of caretaking, and destroying their self-respect, and the internal maps of their community, and of their future, that are a requisite of leftist, progressive, popular revolution.
In short, the culture of prostitution creates a very ripe and welcoming environment for mindless, reactive, 'one-against-the-other' right-wing political reaction, the infamous "good business climate", and creates an impossible social, educational, and psychological environment for leftist, intelligent, cooperative revolutionary development. It seems to me that that was always, and is always, the strategy of the World Bank, The Internazi Monetary Fund, and finance capital generally, right from the start, in one form or another.
When McNamara stared down from that high window in the Pentagon in October of 1967 (I was looking right at him, wondering what he was thinking), and saw that crowd of 50,000 kids attempting to levitate that building (and, in fact levitating him right out of it), inside, one can only guess what he was thinking. Since then, I've realized that he was probaby thinking something like: "Ok. Ok. I can't break your armies, ok, ok, but I can break your soul." That has been, and is, the bottom line regarding all the "Development" strategies of transnational finance capital as best I can tell.
It is not enough for them to, metaphorically, rape the planet; no no, that's not enough for them - they feel compelled, as a matter of high-level financial-defense strategy, to rape its peoples, quite literaly and en mass, as well. Joseph Goebles smiles and tips his hat to Robert McNamara.
Well, it gets worse again; and it also gets closer to home . . . but I'll leave it at that for now . . .
Well, anyway, of course the authors of "Night Market" don't say any of that. Well, actually, they do say, or imply some of it, but the general understanding above originates with me, as best I can tell, from back when I was reading Pacific Research, SE Asia Chronicle, and the ooollllld NACLA.
But the point here is, that - again, I'm only a third the way through this book - but anyway, "Night Market is turning out to be very information-rich, quite to the point, and it seems worth reading slowly. I suppose I'm also a bit prejudiced by the fact that I do feel some ideological kinship with the framework of the authors.
I'm looking forward to the chapters ahead, "Imagining Sexual Others", "The Bar Scene", and "The Unspeakable", and I wonder if they will have the sort of 'case history' type narrative that was so well done in Sturdevant's and Stoltzfus' "US Military Prostitution in Asia".
Well, I don't know what to expect really; they might say anything for all I know. Except at this point, I am kind of expecting this book to be, at the very least, extremely helpful.
November 25, 1997
This was recommended to me by a gal who works in the children's section of one of those big chain bookstores; looking it over, I was skeptical at first, but boy, was she ever on the mark . . . It's about a couple of junior high, and then high school best pals - a gal whose face is completely covered with
scar tissue from a horrible burn at the age of three, and a guy who is of average height but weighs a couple of hundred pounds; a couple of outcast types . . . The guy has a way out though - a gem of a mom, a flair for writing, and a super skill as a competitive swimmer - Sarah Byrnes, on the other hand, is trapped, big time . . . there are a couple of aces in the area though . . . one or two reasonable classmates and a very wonderful teacher. I had a certain amount of trouble reading this book in the beginning - a bit too much sarcasm for me; sarcasm is a general style I'm not real fond of, when overused anyway. But about halfway through; I became totally absorbed, and by the end, well, knockout! . . . very highly recommended . . .
in process - 1/1/98
If "Night Market" (see note two listings above) is about what happens when the bourgeoise captures indigenous girls, "Indian Captive" is about what happens when indigenous people capture a settler girl. It certainly is a different sort of tale.
While this is a fictional account, it seems pretty well researched and probably close to the actual historical situation it refers to. Lois Lenski, the author, before writing this book in the 1930's did a substantial amount of research about the life of a woman named Mary Jamison, who'd lived from the mid 1700's to the mid-1800's. She read Mary's autobiography, visited many historical museums, interviewing the curators, and lived in a Seneca village, watching their artisans work and talking with them about their work and their life.
In fact, the introduction reports that there was a large literature of captured settler children, who were raised by Native Americans, who then, at some point in their lives, recounted their life stories in books that were widely read and appreciated during the 1800's.
The real Mary Jamison had found herself living with the Senecas from her early teenage years, became, in effect, a 'full-blooded' Seneca, had many children within the tribe, and, in her later years, became a highly respected tribal elder. When she was in her '80s, in the 1830's, she told her story to a writer of the day, and it became one of the most famous.
This book, Lois Lenski's fictional rendition, takes place during a two year period around 1750, when Mary Jamison was about 12 years old. She was raised with her Scot and Irish (British, by the politics of the day) parents and their family of seven on a wilderness farm in eastern Pennsylvania. It was a hard life, constant hard work was required of all for barest survival, but her dad was proud of his homesstead and his family's ability to make a go of it. Mary loved the farm life, the corn, all the living things around her, and was a child much favored for her spirits, and her awe of nature.
But around this time, the holocaust against Native Americans was sweeping westward, across eastern Pennsylvania. Apparently, what had been happening, was that the European authorities had taken a pause from their usual fulltime work of murdering native peoples, and decided to settle some things among themselves. So the English hired some of the indigenous people they had been murdering, to kill French settlers, while the French hired others of them to kill English settlers. I think they called it "The French and Indian War", although I really don't know much about it.
Anyway, one day in April, 1758, four French Advisers (how little has changed), with a troup of Iroquois in tow, showed up at her Pennsylvania farm, ordered their troops to wreck the place and Mary and her family were sent on a forced march westward into the Wilderness. Mary was seperated from the group and brought to a Seneca village in what is now Ohio, to be raised as a native American.
The book is about the first two years after capture, and the enormous conflict Mary feels, longing desperately for her family and their farm life, while slowly but surely adopting the ways and understandings of her Native American surroundings.
In the end, she learns that her family, and their homestead had been wiped out, and she gets a good look at the sort of life she'd be living if she chose to rejoin English culture. And she makes her decision.
The book was published in 1941, some thirty years before the current awareness of Native American history had entered the general culture. Still and all, Lois Lenski writes with all the sensitivity that one would expect from current understandings regarding what was done to America's indigenous peoples.
"Indian Captive" must have been quite an eye-opening knockout in 1941 when it was written, and it seems to me to be pretty good history.
(annotation written Jan. 8, 1998; slightly edited and posted April 12, 1998)
And Best Wishes To All . . .
In Order of how helpful I found them to be.
Mothers of the Disappeared, 1987, by Jo Fisher
When Women Rebel, 1985, by Carol Andreas
Books Read In
Books Read In
Annotation in process - 2-12-98 - nm
Annotation still in process - 3-7-98 - note: at 7,000 words
I wrote about twelve thousand words of answer to eighteen of the following twenty-six points, back in Febuary, March, and April, but I've been having enormous difficulties pulling all these papers together. So, for the moment, I'm just going to post the points themselves. Hopefully, that will serve some sort of expository purpose. September 16, 1998
Note: I've left in the link marks for the full paper, but, until and unless I post it, they won't do much.
A. USES A FAULTY AND DISPROVEN STRUCTURAL SYSTEM.
2. This "Selfish Gene" Idea Does Not Include The Gene's Effect On The Surrounding BioEcoSystem, Which Is Absolutely Decisive Factor In Nature's Natural Selection Process.
3. Dawkins Posits A "Selfish-Or-Altruism" "Framework" For Human And Biological Operations, Which I Understand Be An Absolute Fraud.
B. ENGAGES IN A FAULTY AND INACCURATE OVERLAY BETWEEN SPECIES.
5. Humans as machines - no logical level stuff.
6. Claims that harm to, or killing of, or pain in animals is the same dynamic as harm to, killing of, or pain in humans.
7. Uses The Terms Sister Brother Son Daughter Mother Father In Such A Way As To Produce An Exact Overlay In The Reader's Mind Between An Insect's Operations and A Human's Operations, Hitchcock Style.
8. The "Thin-Stream" Absurdity - Claiming That A One-Generation Progression Is The Same As A Ten-Thousand Generation Progression.
C. USES A SCIENTIFICALLY INACCURATE IDEOLOGICAL BASIS FOR THE BIOECOSYSTEM.
01% of the low level operations and calls it the high level system.
12. He Insists That Even When Two Organisms Cooperate, It's In Order To Make Some Other Entity Lose - Everything, According To This Dawkins Book, Is "Winner/Loser" - No Understanding Of New Configurations Simply Increasing The Value Of What Came Before.
13. Presumes that the argument is "Hostile Nature Should Be 'Accepted' vs.
D. THE OLD "BIGGER IS BETTER" NONESENSE.
15. Uses The Explicitly Derogatory Term "Runt" To Describe A Smaller-Than-Average Offspring, Explicitly Stating That Said "Runt" Is Less Worthy Of Survival.
16. Claiming That Larger Organisms Are Better Able To Eat Smaller Organisms.
E. INNACCURATELY PRESUMES THAT GENES ARE HELPFUL/HARMFUL BEHAVIORAL DETERMINANT.
18. Tit for Tat game tactic is cooperative over many rounds but human operations are in first round.
F. FAULTY METHODOLOGICAL REASONING.
20. Glossing over the fact that we share 99% of our genes in common.
G. PRESUMES THAT CARETAKING IS JUST A DECEPTIVE RIP-OFF.
22. Presumes The Cuckoo's Operations Involve Deception.
H. PRESUMES THAT CARETAKING CANNOT EXIST.
24. Claims that population explosion of humans is ordinarily stopped in nature by famine, war plague rather than population explosion of humans is ordinarily stopped in nature by other caretaking.
25. Claims that the central, naturally evolved mechanism for purpose of arresting and solving damage, namely good memory equals carrying a grudge a deliberately derogatory reference.
I. NO HIGH LEVEL UNDERSTANDING OF WHAT SCIENCE IS.
I liked this book a lot, although I'm finding it a bit hard to describe. It's about a girl growing up in Alabama, whose mom died around the time the girl was born, and the book begins when she's about ten years old, when her father, too, disappears. She's left living with her grandmother, and then shuffled to her grandfather's and then her aunt. But she's very alone, extraordinarily so - no real closeness with the adults in her life, nor any real friends elsewhere.
But when she's about thirteen, certain things about her family and her life begin to become apparent, triggered by a respectful grandfather, an encounter with a schoolmate, an aunt taking some psychology classes, and, an unusually lucky break - a therapist with a clue, this last certainly rare enough in this world . . .
Anyway, much of the book is taken up with a recounting of Miracle's (that's the girl's name) early life with her grandmother, amidst seances with the dead, auras, ouiji boards, and dark family secrets. In the end though, via a combined effort on several people's part, it all starts getting combed out into the clear light of day. Miracle starts to get a look at the world as she's been living it, from the perspective of the world as it actually is, and gets a chance to become a competent, skilled, and confident person, and connecting herself, emotionally and intellectually with the world outside.
This story is very well done, I think anyway, and, best I can tell, quite true to life; and also, for some reason, the person at the center of it stays with me, and I think will, for a long time. This is another of those books where, gratefully, I got to cry and cry. Highly recommended.
Books Read In
I've long heard that Casablanca is considered by many people to be the greatest Hollywood film ever made. In reading this book, I finally found out why people like it so much.
I mean, this is kind of a technical book, lots of dates, places, events, names, salaries, chronology, and so forth - technical matters. But amidst all that, and probably also putting together Spoto's biography of Ingrid Bergman, which left me absolutely swooning, and Lux's biography of Bogart, which presented, to me anyway, an entirely engaging character, after reading Aljean Harmetz's "Round Up The Usual Subjects", it did dawn on me why everyone was so thrilled and enchanted with Casablanca.
As stated elsewhere at this site, the bourgeois frame of 'understanding', tops of with the idea that "things-must-necessarily-work-out-poorly-for-some,-or-most,-or-all-people". All bourgeois 'thinking' is based on that high level basis, indeed, in this context, top level basis.
This is very different from the communist framework of understanding, which tops off with the understanding that "things-are-designed-to-by-nature-and-can-work-out-well-for-everyone". All communist thinking is based on that high level basis, that is, that "top level" basis.
In the punchline, farewell scene of Casablanca, Humphrey Bogart (Rick) says to Ingrid Bergman (Ilse):
'The problems of two little people aren't worth a hill of beans compared to the problems of the world.'
(That's not the exact wording actually - I think he said it a bit more romantically; I don't have the exact wording with me right now - but that's close enough for here.
What was so eye-popping and astounding to audiences of the forties and sixties about that line, is that Hollywood, at the strictly enforced bidding of finance capital, never never never allows a communist basis such as that line bespeaks, to slip through. Never before, and never again was such a heresy ever ever allowed. (Well, not that I know of anyway; I'm not that familiar with films, but as best I can tell . . .)
Given the high level ideological framework of the financiers who own Hollywood, since "things-must-necessarily-work-out-poorly-for-some,-or-most,-or-all-people", one cannot really solve the problems of the world, and because such solution is impossible, then, every person's first responsibility is to have for themselves, a nice life.
Within that bourgeois frame of reference, it is 'thought': Sure, if you could solve all the problems of the world, then, maybe it would be ok to make that the primary priority in one's life. Sure, if that were really true, but, the bourgeois claims it can't be done.
So, again, according to the right-wing ideology of the bourgeoisie, since the problems of the world can't really be solved anyway, what you have to do is make sure your first priority is getting things for yourself. Then secondarily, if you want to be a nice fella and do things for people, as a secondary priority, sure, go on. No problem; knock yourself out. As long as, first and foremost, you make sure that your first priority is getting things for yourself.
The other ideology (the only other ideology) is the communist one, namely "things-can-work-out-well-for-everyone". Persons thinking within this basis do not define their lives by what they can get from the world, but rather what they can do for the world. And in this movie, it came down to the wire (as they say) in a big way.
The words of John F. Kennedy come to mind - for all I know, Jack may well have attended the kickoff 1960s revival of the film at Harvard in 1958. To paraphrase Jack, two years later, and in the paraphrase, change the logical level slightly, "Ask not what the world can do for you, rather, ask what you can do for the world."
Back in '42, Ingrid had said to Bogart, ". . . darling, you'll have to do the thinking for both of us", and Bogart essentially said something to the effect of:
'The problems of two little people aren't worth a hill of beans compared to the problems of this world,'
something like - 'we should forego the loves of our lives, because solving the problems of the world is more important'.
Unbelievably unprecedented in Hollywood, and never ever repeated.
This was no throwaway line in a superficial movie; this was the bigtime stuff. Bogart was the biggest star in Hollywood, at about 40, just coming into his zenith, and Ingrid Bergman, in her twenties, was Hollywood's most lionized actress of the time, at the top of public adulation, and later considered by many to have been the greatest screen actress ever.
And Bogart, in the movie, was no idealist - a cynic who knows all about corruption, big time, and is also intensely bitter about losing Ilse (Ingrid) earlier on, and passionately in love with her as well, and Ilse in love also and ready to do whatever Bogart (Rick) thinks is right.
Audiences went absolutely bonkers, in the forties, and again in the 60's, for it raised the communist emotion, high level caretaking, on the grand scale, something audiences don't ever get to see. It's the sort of world everyone wants - a world where the big things count, where there are big reasons for passion, and sometimes the reason for it is even bigger than the passion - but the sort of world that finance capital would never never (except this one time) allow to be portrayed.
So the big question regarding this film, is how the hell did it slip through? How was it allowed, in such a deeply and profoundly convincing way, for the top hero of all Hollywood to tell the top heroine of all Hollywood that solving the problems of the world was more important than the loves of their lives?
Was someone on Wall Street asleep at the wheel? Was Jack Warner (the top producer at the studio) some sort of secret Jewish communist who had stealthily moled his way into Hollywood to promote that nefarious communist propaganda on gullible and unwitting Americans?
Well, not exactly (although later, in the McCarthy days, he certainly was accused of it).
At that moment in the world, the U.S. was in as close to a siege state as the U.S. had ever been in since the Civil War. The Germans and the Japanese Armies were at their greatest powers, and there was a fear in the air that maybe they couldn't be stopped. Danger. I didn't know it before (you learn something every day), but the Japanese Navy had actually shelled the Los Angeles area. Blackouts were frequent, and the script writers were reading the papers every day.
Moreover, the great struggle that even Wall Street was mobilized for, was (gasp!!) an anti-fascist struggle, that great liberal Democratic President, Franklin Delano Roosevelt was at the helm, and even wilder still, our allies, shoulder to shoulder, fighting allies, were the Communists, Chinese Communists and Russian Communists specifically.
Even so, the words didn't just flow out of the scriptwriters' pens. The script changed every day, much of it written on the set. No one was exactly sure how it would come out. The scriptwriters scrambled and scrambled, checking in here, reading the newspapers there, watching the blackouts, checking with Warner, who was in constant touch with Wall Street. The set, which was peopled with actual recent refugees and exiles from fascism from all over Europe, provided major, if subtle clues, and everyone was furiously checking in with everyone else all the time.
It wasn't easy, sort of, bumping shoulders, bumping elbows, bumping hips, so to speak, trying to jostle one's mind into a non-bourgeois, communist frame of reference, 'specially since maybe it was only going to be for this one time, but the writers, and the actors managed it.
In the end, as the war clouds all around darkened, it was allowed, the light turned green for that commie stuff, go go go, and the scriptwriters, now, for a change, allowed to have the great struggles of the peoples of the world surging through their minds, flashed on the great lines.
And at the climax of the film, well, I presume the scriptwriters musta thought - 'they're gonna let us do it, they're gonna let us do it', and then, that wild, communist punchline, which two generations of Americans never quite got over, in my opinion, down to this very day.
Well, so anyway, did I like this book? Well, it was kinda a little on the technical side, but I have to say, it was while I was reading the last few pages of Harmetz's "Round Up The Usual Suspects" that I finally put it all together in my mind. So I'm grateful.
I found this to be a wonderful book. I have never known very much, or almost anything really, about Joan of Arc, except that she had been among those burned at the stake as a witch during the middle ages, which was all I'd really ever heard.
But in reading Donald Spoto's "Notorious" about the life of Ingrid Bergman last year, I was fascinated that Ingrid had been entirely taken with Joan from Ingrid's early childhood and had read voluminously about her throughout her life.
Then, in leafing through a book by Andrea Dworkin at a bookstore recently, I ran across a section that Dworkin had written on Joan, in which she noted that more than 5,000 books on Joan had been written, mostly in France, with more and more being written all the time. Apparently, that makes Joan of Arc, by far, the single most written about person in all history; remarkable, I thought, especially considering that Joan had died at the age of only nineteen, not to mention the fact that teenage girls, at least until recently, have tended to be perhaps the group that western societies have taken the least seriously. So what was it about Joan I wondered . . .
Well, this is a fictional story written for children, and I don't know how close it is to Joan of Arc's actual life, but it certainly, to me anyway, does ring true to life altogether. Here, Joan seems about ten, eleven, twelve, to about fifteen, or something like that (just before she leaves home), living with her family on a sheep farm in the French countryside in the early 1400's. Her family is quite close, and her parents, simple country people, are quite just and wise and kind, and take her most seriously, and she has an excellent relationship with her siblings, her cousins, her friends, and especially all the animals, and nature, and the beautiful French countryside.
She, and the children around her, are very well protected in their snug little farm, while at the same time, she has a keen awareness of the marauding British troops nearby and their local allies, and of the plagues as well, bubonic, and leprosy, and more, just beyond view. As a growing child, she is deeply aware of the beauty, the warmth, the love, the peace, the grandeur of life all around her, and the justice of the basic system of things - the 'system of things' being my own math and science way of saying; God being the expression used for that in her village - and, at the same time, she is increasingly aware of the terrible evils that stalks just beyond the horizon. Profoundly just and loving protection locally, and a keen awareness of injustice in the world so nearby . . . for any child with such a full experience and understanding, it is a volatile combination indeed - in our own day for the young Mao and Fidel, for Darwin and Bowlby, for Malcom and Martin, for Pete Seeger and Ingrid, for me, and for so much of my entire generation, and, it seems, in her day, for Joan as well . . .
"Young Joan" is written in the first person, from Joan's point of view, and I especially liked the fact that there is much sweet dialogue between Joan and her young friends. To my mind, the writing style is wonderful, the language is enchanting, the frame of reference is genuine, and, I think the author, Barbara Dane, has done a truly fine job. Definitely recommended.
. . . . child of mine, work for those who labor
fight for children weak from hunger,
so rest your head and close your eyes,
Justice has many friends it,
sure as the sun will light up the sky,
Books Read In
I've had this around and have been leafing through it for about three or four years, so, as I couldn't at the moment afford the forty dollars for Johanson's "From Lucy to Language" and wanted to read something new on paleoanthropology, I decided to finally sit down and read this one all the way through.
This book, "The First Humans" is actually a collection of articles by about 25 different scientists, and woven together by Goran Burenhult, but all written in pretty much the same framework. It does have quite a lot of relevant information, but only the first third is devoted to the human evolutionary period specifically (approx. 5 million years ago to 100,000 years ago), and the writing style is a bit more disassociated than what I would expect from, say, Johanson.
Generally speaking, this book seems basically designed to be expository rather than conclusive, noting a lot of different, and often contradictory medium level conclusions from the evidence described and, or so it seems, avoiding taking a definitive stand on the key issues. It's one of those large, super clay-paper type books, with about three or four hundred dazzling pictures and diagrams; it seems almost more designed to generate conversation than for specifically sorting things out.
In the second third of the book, which focuses on European cave art, there is material that is very new to me, and the material in the last third or so, early Homo Sapiens developments world-wide is also stuff I'm not that familiar with.
Anyway, the first part was pretty interesting. My biggest problem with it is, it generally seems to be written in the old "nature-is-basically-a-hostile-and-competitive-environment" framework, albeit amidst signs that that framework is being rapidly demolished in the professional world, even as it is clung to.
Typical is the following paragraph, in article by Roland Fletcher from the very first pages:
There is a presumption that the current state of humankind as regards killing was present prior to a few thousand years ago, which it was clearly not - clear to me certainly.
Rather than 'lacking behavioral controls', as he presumes, in fact, we have more behavioral controls than any other animal, and at a whole higher logical level too.
Caring unique or not unique? My god, caring is about the only thing that happens at all in nature! Same for what he refers to as "reciprocal 'altruism'".
"Helping . . . closely related individuals with similar genes to survive"? How about helping it's bioecosystem to survive.
"Moral values?" How about "finding ways for things to work out well all around", just like what every other animal, creature, and plant does.
A recent development? Hypocrisy is the recent development, not "moral values", as he seems to be using the term anyway.
The Book is clearly written in the old "one-against-the-other" framework, and parts come straight out of Dawkins' (see "Selfish Gene" review [in process]), but with enough inconclusiveness, convolution, and contradiction to strongly hint of the rapidly changing paradigm in this field.
My own conclusion, of course, is more definitive than the tenor of this book: it is that all nature, and the basic structure of human operations within it, is an eminently cooperative enterprise, with "one-against-the-other" conflict being a .1% factor, and even an anomaly.
In the basic design of biology, and of human nature in biology, that "one-against-the-other" 'framework' is not an 80% factor, nor a 55% factor, nor a 20% factor, nor a 1% factor, but rather, a one-per-one-thousand or one-per-ten-thousand factor in nature's overwhelmingly cooperative system.
Homeostasis and meta-homeostasis as biology's fundamental structure, more simply put, cooperation and "work-well-together", is rapidly replacing the old "cause and effect", "hydraulic", "reaction and counterreaction", "basic hostility" type of frame of reference, in this field, and in other human-related fields as well, but some of the main writers don't quite seem to be quite aware of that yet, or at best, only dimly aware of it.
Well, in the middle third of the book, there is quite a lot of information and photography of the European cave artwork of circa 30,000 years ago to about 10,000 years ago, but again, I found the "interpretations" a bit more mystical and "spiritual" than I've concluded to have been the case.
My own idea is that Homo Sapiens, and earlier species, were substantially more science-minded, and singular-truth-oriented than they are often claimed to be. This may be confusing to some people, as in current (capitalist) societies, science is associated in many people's mind with the masculine, and 'spiritualism' with the feminine, but, it is my conclusion that, well, I don't know anything about the masculine, but as best I can tell, pre-ten-thousand-year-ago-people, and pre-humans as well, were firmly rooted in the matrifocal/cooperative understanding, and in strict formal science as the word is strictly understood - the singular-reality, accurate/or/not-accurate framework, Science.
Maybe that's hard for people who are subject to deceiving and crackpot capitalist propaganda (media, academic, or whatever) to imagine - human roots turning out to be, in fact, matrifocal/science-minded/cooperative, with the entire idea that human roots were some sort of dominator/spiritual/hunter-warrior type 'framework', being the cruelest and most powerfully crackpot, anti-science hoax, and I do mean Hoax, in the full letter and spirit of the term, of modern times.
Anyway, in the last third of the book, the authors continue the story and illustrations, through the spread of Homo Sapiens across the world, particularly over the most recent 30,000 years, and there is much material, that is new to me, regarding cultures in the North, the Pacific region, and the Americas. Once again, I have come to understand that "matrifocal" (see "Beyond the Wave", elsewhere at this web-site) was the way of things throughout all pre-10,000 year old cultures, throughout all pre-10,000 year human history, and indeed, going back at least several species before that. But you won't get any sense of that in reading this book.
Again, it is written within the old, and I think, entirely inaccurate "one-against-the-other" paradigm, with only the barest hints that there is a newer and far more accurate cooperative/matrifocal understanding of our roots awhispering in the wings.
One can only guess who New York's 'American Museum of Natural History's' biggest funders are these days; not a bunch of communists, obviously. As always, the corruptionist banks and corporations function as the most anti-science drag on all the directly human-related fields. Oh well . . .
All the same, despite the less-than-clear style, and the rapidly crumbling approach that the author takes to the high level framework of these matters, there is an awful lot of good low-level information, there's lots of nice pictures, I did learn some things, and it does give a kind of, again, disassociated overview of the current state of the physical findings in the field.
mostly written April 8, 1998 (appended and updated, Summer, 1998)
This had been on my bookshelf for about two years, but I'd been putting off reading it for some reason or other; I suppose I had some fear of what it would say regarding something I consider to be a very volatile subject. But actually, it turns out to be pretty well done, helpful, informative, sensitively written, a fairly accurate balance, I presume, and a good contribution to research on this and related subjects. Clues, I think.
I have pages and pages of notes on my most recent, full read-through of this book, but I can't pull them together right now. I'll see if I can just mention a couple of quick things.
This book is about the major advancements in science, the revolutionary changes, which Kuhn shows is very different from what most people think of as 'scientific advancement'. He had some major clues, still untapped to this day, back in 1962 (the Kennedy days) when the first edition of this book was published.
He explains that 99% of scientists operate within the framework of what he calls "normal science", which includes almost all of what people usually think of as scientific advancement. Normal science, as he uses the term, is the routine, day to day work done in scientific enterprise, as well as most discoveries and innovations, which, while they are indeed discoveries, they operate within the generally known principles of contemporary science.
In fact, it was Kuhn's most important finding that the really big changes in science - Copernicus' understanding that the earth moves, Lavoiser's and Dalton's discovery of atoms and the periodic table, the wholesale changes of "the frame of reference" itself, actually come very rarely.
It's a little like what is known regarding evolution generally (see Tattersall's 'Fossil Trail' for a current explanation of this matter in evolution theory) There are very small incremental changes that happen over a long period of time, all within the going framework, in the case of evolution, the going species - but the big changes, the major species changes - like the major scientific changes of framework, the changes of paradigm, come all at once, suddenly, basically overnight.
"Slow change", advancement-type change, at least at this level, is not the rule in science, any more than it is in evolution, or in politics for that matter. Rather, when talking about the major advancements, the rare, overall changes, then, in those kinds of cases, not 'slow change', no no, but rather 'overnight change' is the rule.
Kuhn does use the word "Revolution" in the title rather deliberately, and mentions that if people associate that word with political revolution, on the grand scale, that is indeed, definitely the type of thing he means.
Aside from discussing the process of scientific revolution itself, a lot of this book is spent detailing some of the extreme frustrations that the very few scientists who are grasping for or encountering a new paradigm, have in attempting to deal with the vast majority of scientists. Again, 'normal science' is the rule that everyone lives by, and scientists have as much trouble as anyone else, in even being able to conceptualize a more advanced paradigm, very much including, indeed, perhaps especially within their own field.
Some of this, he notes, stems from the way science education textbooks are written in the first place, and he severely criticizes general science education as inaccurately portraying major scientific advancement as simply incremental change. He seems to think that the failure (refusal, I would say) of the science establishment to inform students of the nature of an entire "change of framework" is the major impediment to developing the best helpfulness in the field.
This certainly was and is an important book, but having given ample credit to Kuhn elsewhere in this bibliography, for some of my own most important understandings, I'll just briefly list here three criticisms that I have of his work.
For one thing, he spends pages and pages, whole chapters even, of extremely complex and sometimes unfathomable writing explaining what a scientific revolution is, which, I think anyway, could be done quite clearly, in just a few paragraphs.
One could simply make a clear description of the parameters of a given paradigm, a description of the elements in it, the scientific concepts in it, and then go on to do the same with the next, more advanced paradigm.
One would then show which elements, which scientific concepts from the old paradigm remained in place in the new paradigm, and which were discarded, and then further go on to show that the old paradigm itself is not simply discarded, but rather goes on to become itself a lower level element in the new, higher level, vastly more inclusive paradigm.
It's not that complicated. He makes it seem like you have to be a rocket scientist, almost literally, to understand it, but that's not the case. Junior high school kids got the mental equipment to pick this stuff up, easy. That's what I think, anyway. But as it stands now boy, you don't get this stuff until graduate school, if then . . .
I suppose one of the reasons it may seem so easy to me now is, in the years after reading Kuhn's book, I actually worked out a very simple set of diagrams detailing this matter, and the whole mathematical/conversational system illuminating the basic structure which he works from ("Paradigm from California, Volume One, Chapter Two, Logical Types And Logical Levels" ©1983 by Neil Miller, and a brief 400 word summary in Schema).
So it's easy for me to think of being able to easily explain it to anyone in about an hour. I mean, after all, I had the benefit of reading his discovery of the structure of this phenomenon in science history, but he didn't have the benefit of seeing my clarified illumination, as applied to all biological, including human phenomena. (I suupose I should mention that my own "clarified illumination" regarding this general phenomenon came not only from Kuhn, but also from Russell and Whitehead, from Bateson, and Watzlawick, from Minuchin and Bowlby, not to mention The Beatles, and a host of others.)
Anyway, still and all, as I mentioned in another Kuhn annotation elsewhere in this file, there is an unnecessary complexity to Kuhn's writing style, that I think is all too typical of way too much science writing.
Another criticism I must make of Kuhn's work is, he completely leaves out all social context for the development of scientific revolutions (new paradigms). He didn't seem to understand that through all history, as a fundamental pattern of human operations, scientific revolutions are driven by the built-in human drive to caretake human societies; that is, that the function in nature, of scientific revolution among humans, is to solve the great harm-to-human problems.
He talks about it as if the only reason scientists come up with anything, is to serve science. Sort of like "science for science's sake"; sort of like the old "art for art's sake", in both cases, a mathematical and psychological absurdity as best I can tell, and anyway, certainly having nothing to do with why these abilities evolved in humans.
And third, there is no acknowledgment of intellectual dishonesty in the world of science. The alleged 'inability' of scientists to recognize and acknowledge very clear and obvious advancements in their own field is chalked up to some sort of unconscious denial, but it is my quite firm conclusion that more often than not, such failure to acknowledge advancements is the result not of unconscious denial, or anything like that, but rather, fully conscious dishonesty. This, in my opinion, is an extremely central point that Kuhn never once addresses (at least that I can recall).
Well, even with all that, still and all, this is a majorly formidable work, very powerful and extremely helpful stuff, and he came up with it in 1962, right on time. Had Jack Kennedy not been murdered, it's quite probable, not merely possible, but entirely probable, that "The New Frontier" would have become what it was supposed to be, namely an overall society-wide, indeed, world-wide advancement in paradigm, rather than the rag-tag protest movement that it became in all too many ways.
I don't mean to depreciate the great things that we all did, back in the 1960s, with what we had at the time, but in the Kennedy days, there were many pieces in place, very much including Kuhn's "Structure of Scientific Revolutions", for taking what we were all really trying to do, all the way.
In my opinion, as I have stated more than once elsewhere at this site, if the profoundly petty and desperate little gnats of the Republican Party had been prevented (by the electorate and the astoundingly deranged media) from constantly gnawing away at the Clintons all these past six years, Mr. Clinton, could well have brought to fruition the work that Kennedy, and Kuhn, were attempting to engender and administrate.
Further note on September 25th, 1998: I marked about thirty choice quotes from this book, which I was going to type in, and, one at time, comment on. But, well, I just couldn't get that together. So, I'll just do this one.
The following comes from the 1970 edition, page 121, but I am assuming that it first appeared in the original, 1962 publication.
Today research in parts of philosophy, psychology, linguistics, and even art history, all converge to suggest that the traditional paradigm is somehow askew.
That failure to fit is also made increasingly apparent by the historical study of science to which most of our attention is necessarily directed here.
None of the crisis-promoting subjects has yet produced a viable alternate to the traditional epistemological paradigm, but they do begin to suggest what some of that paradigm's characteristics will be.
That was Kuhn in 1962. The following is me some thirty years later:
There has never been any doubt in my mind, that it is highly probable, that had Jack and Malcom not been murdered, then, by the mid 1960's, Malcom X would have, one way or another, found Kuhn's understandings about "framework", or the equivalent elsewhere, and, under Kennedy's brilliant and able administration, brought this essential "work-out-well-all-around" paradigm "in from the blue", thirty years ago. That's what the 1960s was supposed to be about!
And instead of it being called "Paradigm from California", and emanating essentially from the inner states of the girlhood character, presumably it would have been called something like
"Paradigm from Africa"; the same structure, but the flesh and blood of it emanating from the inner states of Africans everywhere.
Paradigm From Africa, every historian's and scientist's and paleoanthropologist's and poet's dream. The oldest culture on earth, the very roots of humanity, yielding the original paradigm of life. PERFECT!
But, what should have happened, what was supposed to happen, what was "in the stars" to happen, did not happen, as is so often the case in these viscous and criminally sociopathic, non-communist societies.
Instead, the deranged ones, currently well represented by The Republican 'Heil Hitler' Party - alongside the most reactionary sectors of finance capital, who seem to have a deadly "scorpion-hold" on the mass-media - all fearing, desperately fearing, the exposure of their profoundly dishonest, personally, socially, and globally suicidal, crackpot, and fundamentally vacant way of reaction and way of "life", used their only real recourse in the face of impending, overall paradigm advancement - GUNS!!! - and Bam! Bam!, put an end to that "in the stars" development forthwith.
I caught a scent, picked up a trail; absolutely INvoluntarily developed an unhappy, loser, sleeping, stumbling, mumbling, alone, 'mr. nobody' way of life, and maybe therefore, accidentally survived (so far, barely), and managed to pull in from "out-of-the-blue", that same essential paradigm, but in this slightly lower level form. Malcom would have done better, way better; there's no doubt in my mind of that. Malcom and Jack, what a team, manna from heaven!
So that's what we lost, in Dallas and Harlem! Nothing less! We lost thirty years; we lost a billion people, and, as a consequence of that, we lost half our brains and two thirds of our health. That's what we lost in Dallas and Harlem.
So, thirty years later, I got the second-best possible paradigm, of these two alternatives anyway, for sure for sure, while slipping through my fingers were the billion persons unnecessarily beaten to death in the time between. Not to mention the billion rapes, and the rainforests, and the toxins, and everything else.
I'm sorry; I'm very very very sorry. In fact, I am the sorriest person in the whole world; have been, all my life. Sad, ain't it? Don't you feel sorry for me yet? (what does it take . . .)
But anyway, still and all, here it is. The long-fabled paradigm. Best I can tell, it's the same basic structure anyone else woulda got; the only structure possible for this round - just different clothing, so to speak, than if Malcom had gotten it under Kennedy, as he was obviously, fully capable of, and headed straight for, in a beeline.
I say all this, so that the reader bears in mind that these big changes are not about them being "in the stars" at this time or at that time, or "catching the wave", or getting the right, high level timing.
('Timing' type factors in general, incidentally, seems to be among Mr. Clinton's many strong abilities; but that particular factor just happens to be my own weak suit (among many others). Frankly, I think you get that sort of stuff from actually being around women, rather than just reading books about them, but what would I know? I wouldn't know from 'timing' if I bumped into it in the street.)
But the point is, that this paradigm, in one form or another, has been "in the stars" for ten thousand years. It should have been, and could have been brought in-from-the-blue, a long long time ago, were it not for these unspeakably imbecilic reactionary Republican-Party/mass-media monsters, deciding to kill - by ones and twos, via starvation and torture, and with genocide and worse - any sign of nature's "cooperative/matrifocal/science" paradigm that dares rear its head, for ten thousand long years.
As regards the big issue (that's issue, singular), as regards the big issue, whether we're talking eleven thousand years ago, or five thousand years ago, or one thousand years ago, or five hundred, or two hundred or thirty years ago, or two weeks ago, or yesterday, or tomorrow, or two weeks from now, or two months or two years, as regards the big issue, always, always always always, sooner is better than later. In these big sorts of matters, ALWAYS. As regards these big sorts of matters, the ONLY "good timing", is SOONER rather than later.
September 25th, 1998
I decided to read this book, mainly because I loved the other three books I've read by this author ("Lyddie", "Bridge to Terabithia", and "The Great Gilly Hopkins"). But as it turned out, I had some difficulty with it, mainly regarding the terribly brutal killings that, for perhaps good reason, were part of the tale.
The story starts out on a plot of land in central China; a boy and his father and mother, desperately poor peasants, working their ancestral land.
The boy is kidnapped by bandits, hauled off to the distant city, and sold for cash. But the buyer, as it turns out, is in disguise - not a slave owner at all, but rather, a young woman, and a spy for the "Heavenly Kingdom", a group of rebels holed up in the mountains just beyond the city. The boy is given some money for survival and sent on his way. Frightened of the city, and overcome with curiosity, he returns to learn more, and joins the group.
This was all around 1850; at that time, the British were saturating China with opium so as to draw out the vast wealth of the region, leaving the peasants and of course the vast bulk of the population in a far more desperate and bitter situation than ever.
The "Manchu" was the collaborationist government of the day, and the rebellion of the Heavenly Kingdom was designed to overthrow the Manchus, drive out the British, liberate the women, and bring justice to all.
But the overall ideology of the rebellion is based on the teachings of Christian missionaries, and in fact, it calls for "belief" and "following" (rather than cognition and intelligence) as the primary judgment system, and war and killing (rather than literacy and principled association) as the premiere methods of operation.
And although the young woman spy who initially befriends the boy becomes a great horsewoman for the rebel armies, there is in fact a strict separation the sexes, making impossible any real partnership between the warriors and the feminine.
As time goes on, killing in self-defense turns to massacre, the most principled people are killed, often via intrigue and betrayal, and the rebellion, finally victorious, becomes just another round of warlord rule.
The ending of the book did startle me somehow, and adds another, unpreforseen (by me) dimension to how I understood the story. It is only in looking at it from the perspective of the ending, that the whole thing, in my mind anyway, turns into one of those powerfully enchanting fables of ancient China . . .
Overall, it is kind of a fascinating tale, perhaps one of the many preludes to the Eighth Route Army's Long March of a century later, which finally did get it right, mostly anyway, as regards literacy and association - at least that.
"Rebels of The Heavenly Kingdom" is a good story, and I guess my only problem with this book is that the people in it could do nothing except choose from the two unacceptable - to me certainly - alternatives, as they were the only possibilities that occurred to them: either accept hated Manchu/British rule, or overthrow it with a traditional warlord rule (albeit in "christian" guise).
To me, it always seems that there must be another way, and I certainly know that there is, but in terms of what people are actually faced with regarding what they can see, perhaps there is something I still don't understand. And then again, maybe not . . .
Extra: The Magazine of FAIR March/April, 1998; Volume 11, Number 2; 28 pages
I hadn't quite realized that the tortures and murders in Chiapas are also being privatized by the multi-national corporations, like everywhere else. It seems like the US/European corporations are counting on the Gingrichs' and Republican Parties of the world to destroy all vestiges of popular government and are, helter skelter, building their replacement (corporate) governments - privatized armies of torturers and mass murderers everywhere (euphemistically called "paramilitaries"). From the militias of the US to the mobs of Russia to the "paras" of Chiapas and Columbia, to Rwanda to Germany to Guatemala to god knows where else, it's all nothing but a corporate privatization scheme to bypass the pressures and restraints and scrutiny of popularly elected governments, governments which the multinationals are attempting to do away with anyway.
The obvious tactics in the US are to frame-up liberals by any means necessary - bogus "sex scandals" being only the current rage of many such fads - which, when people fall for it, necessarily brings on Republican Party super-corruption leading to deliberate government shutdowns and general economic disaster - all in hopes of discrediting elected government altogether.
Instability and desperation does most, definitely, NOT bring progressive change, but rather, brings reactionary change.
The multi-nationals and their right-wing agents are well aware of that; it is the progressives, at least here in the US, who seem so unfathomably in-the-blue regarding these matters. The only block on these increasingly blatantly brutal privatizations, whether of prisons or welfare or anything else in the US, or of marauding, butchering private, corporate-owned armies ('paramilitaries/militias') abroad or at home, the only block on them is strong liberal government - liberal meaning with at least some popular input, and at least some popular oversight. The surest way to increase the power of the most viscous, the most corrupt, and the most brutal sectors is to help blame the liberals for it, therein helping the reactionaries into gaining increased power. It's such an obvious corporate/media/right-wing strategy, it astounds me that progressives so easily fall for such a stupid and suicidal trap.
Well, there is a very very big election coming up in November, and if progressives continue to follow their mass-media nose (despite their claims of seeing through it all), and play it as they did the last two times around, refusing to vigorously assist Democrats in every way possible, then we will all get vastly increased brutality in every corner of the world.
Mr. Clinton barely holds on - as neither Kennedy, nor McGovern, nor Carter, nor Mondale could - but even Mr. Clinton only barely, and he relies on electoral power, everyone knows that quite well - no one, including me, seems to disagree with that. It seems also rather obvious that he would vastly vastly prefer for that electoral power to be liberal Democrat, fully backed by progressives. It seems obvious to me that he would love to be able to turn to the corporations and say "hey, what can I do? they all voted liberal; we gotta play ball . . . "
So instead, progressive forces, taking their cues from the mass-media, sit on their hand like a bunch of snotty, suicidal dilettantes, parroting the right-wing/mass-media/whitewater/campaign-contribution/idiotic/sex-snickering line, and hand the Clintons, Republican victory after victory, wasting, I said WASTING to the end, the potentially most liberal, and certainly most brilliant chief administrator that this country has seen in a long, long time.
So why do I raise this in an annotation about Columbia? or Chiapas? I dunno . . . maybe because it seems entirely clear to me that as goes the elections this November (or any November for that matter, but this one right now for sure), so goes the life or death of tens of thousands of villagers, and far far more throughout Latin America and the world. You think it's bad in Guatemala, or Kosovo, or Columbia, or Chiapas now? What the hell do you think it would look like if Dole had won that election. Not to mention vastly vastly increased viciousness and reaction in all sectors here at home (Republican victories) - as opposed to increased breathing room for progressive organizing (big Democrat victories).
People keep snickering those corporate/mass-media snickers about Clinton. Gonna hand Clinton, and Hillary, a Newt Gingrich congress again, on a silver platter, again, because Clinton's not radical enough. (!!??!!) It's Sooo Crazy!!!
Oh well, who the hell am I. This page gets maybe a big seven hits a day, tops, and all of them probably repeats or just disassociated, or maybe the occasional right-winger snickering away. I suppose I'm just howling at the moon, like a goddamn idiot . . .
Oh well, onward . . .
Adbusters: Journal of the Mental Environment, Spring, 1998; No. 21; 68 pages
This journal is entirely new to me, and looks quite promising. I was extremely pleased to read some exposure of the anti-Clinton machinations, and although it doesn't go quite deep enough for me - i.e. why is the right-wing and the corporate media is so desperate to destroy Clinton the articles here have far too little defensive and counter-attacking material, I think anyway, regarding the current media anti-Clinton absurdities. But anyway, I was certainly delighted to see some exposure of the Republican-Party/corruptionist-press scandals, so that's promising. This journal is said by its editors to be in the "independent" journalism tradition of I. F. Stone, which sounds good to me, mostly anyway.
I.F. Stone's newsletter was something I read, religiously, from the days when I was in elementary school in the early fifties, all the way to it's last issues in the mid sixties, and in all that time, I don't think I missed one single word, rereading issues again and again. It was a major mainstay for me the whole time I was growing up. But there were, it seemed to me, two I.F. Stones, and to this day, I've never quite figured it out.
The main feature that I loved so much was the "Same Paper / Same Day" feature, which was, without question, one of the absolutely formative journalistic innovations of my life, and was a crucially important precursor to my thinking in writing "Paradigm from California" thirty years later. What Stone did in that feature, which appeared in virtually every issue, was quote a line or paragraph from the NY Times that showed a certain fact, and then, "Same Paper / Same Day", quote a line or paragraph from an editorial that showed a presumption of exactly the opposite of what the article had reported. What that indicated to me was that the Times was not "missing things" "overlooking things", sloppy, stupid, or blind, but, rather that the editors were deliberately, I'll repeat that, deliberately, consciously, and forcefully, lying about what they understood the truth to be!
This is very very very different from being "mistaken", or exercising "poor judgment". And the difference is crucial. If a listener or reader really believes that a speaker or writer actually doesn't see what that speaker or writer does see perfectly well, then the listener gets an extremely inaccurate view of how other humans see things, and an extremely inaccurate view of what the most productive line of research and line of conversation will be. For example, if one thought that the NYT or anyone else of that level of awareness actually thought that the U.S. was fighting for freedom and democracy in Vietnam (or the Congo, or Iran, or Guatemala, or Brazil, or anywhere else), then a listener puts all their attention and energy into showing that the U.S. actually despises freedom and democracy in the region.
However, if it turns out to be true that the NYT actually believes that freedom and democracy in Vietnam would lead the people of that region to control their own resources, their own culture, their own workplaces, their own land, and everything else, in cooperative, or communist fashion, and the NYT fears that therefore corporate desires to bleed the country and the people of the area of their energy and their wealth would be thwarted, then a reader or listener puts their energy and their research into trying to figure out why the NYT is so sure that the corporations are supposed to be robbing, raping, torturing, and murdering their way through the world.
If someone believes that they are supposed to be robbing and murdering a people, but a listener operates on the presumption that they don't understand that that's what they're doing, then the listener is absolutely wasting their time - and much worse - trying to convince them that they are doing that.
I'm not great with analogies, but maybe it's something like, if someone mugs you, or murders the people around you, is it helpful to endlessly try to convince this poor innocent (murderer) person that he did that (which he already smirkingly knows perfectly well), or is it better to operate on the accurate understanding that his understanding of what he's done is not the problem, but rather proceed on the understanding that his certainty that what he's supposed to do is steal, rape, murder and lie about it, is the problem.
My whole focus, then and now, was and is, not to uncover what everyone, especially the corporations and their media already know about the crimes that the corporations and their media commit, but rather to sort out why the corporations and their mass media are so sure that their supposed to rob, rape, poison, and murder the world, and lie about being well aware of the fact that they're doing that.
In those days, the question I had was, if they're so sure that they're supposed to do that (which they obviously were in Vietnam and elsewhere), then why do they lie about doing it? In those days, the big question I tried to answer was, how come none of these nazi US and European corporations and their corruptionist mass media don't just say bluntly - "hey, we'll just rob and rape all these little countries blind, and kill anyone that tries to stop us." If that's what they think they should do, which it is, then why don't they just say that? I finally found the answer many many years later, which was, that people don't put out very much, if they think they are just being deliberately robbed and tortured and tormented, so in order for the capitalists to actually get people to put out, they must convince people that they are really just sweet fellas who just really don't understand how vicious they are being.
Later on, when I was able to prove, scientifically prove that the large scale horror, torture, and toxins that they, the corporations, and their media put out and defend, were in NO ONE'S interest, including their's, then my research continued into why the hell do they continue along that insanely suicidal pathway.
So everyone around me was trying to convince others that all these terrible things were happening to third world peoples, and non-white people, and women, and impoverished people generally, and I was trying to sort out why, since the corporations and the media were well aware of the deliberate harm and destruction that they were doing, why did they consciously lie about being the mass-murdering psychopaths they were and are, rather than boast about it? And after I figured that out, I tried to sort out why, since it was in no one's interest, including their own, to operate that way, to plunder and murder the world that that feeds them, why did they seemed to think that it was in their interest.
It's like, if you spend your time and energy attempting to convince them of things they already know, you spin your wheels absolutely worthlessly, you develop a very inaccurate view of how the human mind works and what it sees, you never even notice the issues that really need to be cracked in order to solve the big problems, while the smirking, imbecilic, suicidal psychopaths of finance capital, the large corporations, and their astoundingly corrupt media mouthpieces are smirking, and giggling under their breath all the way to the (blood) bank. (That's why I call 'em the "laughing imbeciles at the top".)
Worse still, much much much worse, if you spend enough time and energy attempting to convince someone of what they already know, eventually, YOU pick up THEIR frame of reference!!! A person eventually "just", out of sheer exhaustion (and other interactive psychodynamic factors which I explain elsewhere at this site), a person just comes to the inaccurate conclusion that there's no way to get through (ridiculous, you already got through, before you even started). Since the explainer "figures out" that there's no way to make the other person see (untrue, but seems to be true), then the explainer just accepts that one really can't change things (again, inaccurate, but seems to be accurate). Now, of course, the exhausted explainer is well on their way to adopting the whole frame of reference of the deranged ones.
Rather than crack the case of finding out why The New York Time and the rest of the corporate mass media lies about what they understand, and crack the case of why they think the mass suicidal behavior (socially toxic operations in Vietnam, Latin America, Africa, and elsewhere), which is in NO ONE'S interest, why they think it is in their interest - rather than crack those cases, the explainer who treats them like they're honest folks, spins 'round and 'round at square one forever. And, more often than not, finally comes to adopt their dishonest mode of operations. Et voila - the death of progressive movements.
So anyway, in reading I.F. Stones Weekly, with that "Same-Paper/Same-Day" feature (sometimes "Same-Paper/Same-Page"!!) back when I was in Junior High and High School in the '50s and early '60s, I skipped over the whole stage of attempting to explain to people what it was obvious that they already knew and were simply lying about knowing, and went directly to the stage of inquiring why they claim to not understand what they understand perfectly well.
While it was Stone that was so powerfully important in setting me on that whole research track, that is, doing research on the basis of what people actually see, rather than doing research on what people claim that they see, far far far more productive research. The weird thing for me was that Stone himself couldn't himself hold. I don't know why exactly. I remember years later, I bought a copy of a book entitled "The I.F. Stone Reader". I eagerly looked for page after page of those cherished "Same-Paper/Same-Day" features, but I was absolutely astounded that, not only were they not there, but there was no mention of them of any kind. It was almost as if his most important, most brilliant, and most innovative contribution had been erased from history, perhaps even with his consent. Whoa. Pretty sad stuff, to say the least. I read later articles by him, in The New York Review of Books, and boy, as I recall, they were terrible. And if I'm not mistaken, I seem to recall that he even, astoundingly, supported the "lone assassin" absurdity. It seemed to me the man had lost his clues.
Oh well . . . it happens I suppose . . . but there's no taking it away from the old-time, spankin sharp, eye-poppin, "Same-Paper/Same-Day" I.F. Stone's Weekly.
What I'd have to say to the new "iF Magazine" editors, is that the brilliance of "I.F. Stone's Weekly", was NOT that he exposed the inaccuracies of the corporate mass media, no no, that's just so ridiculously easy it's almost a joke to even bother. Kindergarten stuff. No no. A journal in the great tradition of the original, unique, profound, and truly innovative I.F. Stone's Weekly, would be exposing, in that concise and brilliant I.F. Stone's Weekly manner, the criminally deranged, and sociopathically reactionary Dishonesties of The New York Times, and of everyone who looks to them for clues. That's where the real helpfulness rests.
And best wishes to all . . .
--- neil
Neil Robert Miller
Written - July 10, 1998; Appended - September, 1998
Books Read In
376 pages plus notes and index
This looks like a major blockbuster . . . for one thing, there seems to be a whole chapter on Judy Bari . . . anyway, this is another book I'm seriously looking forward to reading . . . (April 29)
I found this to be an excellent expose of the powerfully violent and extremely dishonest nature of the well-funded and well-coordinated attacks on all attempts to arrest the deadly toxification of this planet. Even I didn't realize quite how ugly and how deliberately and blatantly deceptive the corporate-driven toxifiers have become. They seem to be so astoundingly, and suicidally hell-bent on destroying this planet and deliberately operating with an incredibly dishonest and viscous dishonesty. I get the feeling that the multi-national corporations have concluded we're all doomed and have taken it on as their personal mission to speed up the pace, and do it in as deceptive a manner as possible.
Anyway, I found this book to be very well done, and highly recommended.
Got it! I've been wanting to get a hold of this one since the day it was published last year - but I couldn't afford it . . . then, I missed a reviewer's copy at Aardvark by one day, and one at Moe's in Berkeley by twenty minutes, but yesterday, I finally caught a used copy in mint condition at a price I could momentarily (almost) afford at Green Apple up on Clement Street. It means eating only three times per week for the next month, instead of four. But boy, am I ever looking forward to reading this . . . I'm expecting a lot from Dr. Johanson . . . hope it's good . . . (April 29)
. . . . .
This book turned out to be a good overview of the state of the art regarding what physical evidence has been found to date by fossil hunters and what paleoanthropoligists have been able to conclusively figure out about those finds, that is, about what the pre-humans who once walked in those bones were like.
It's a little strange: on the one hand, it's truly amazing how much has been found out and scientifically confirmed, and on the other hand I find it also amazing how sketchy the hard information about the daily life and social relationships of pre-humans really was.
Johanson is, in my opinion, an excellent scientist, clearly demarking what is known, what is thought likely but not proved, what is thought possible, and what has been disproved.
But I get the feeling that he studiously avoids taking too much of a stand on what I see as the most important high level issues, namely, as I mentioned in my Burenhult annotation above, the matter of a cooperative/matrifocal pre-human history, as different from a dominator/competitor pre-human history.
I do detect that Johanson's somewhat backed-off approach to that comes from an awareness that the paradigms, as a matter of cold, hard science, are almost at war (so to speak) at the moment - that this is a time that the overall understandings are all changing rapidly, and as a scientist, he, sort of, just wants to, give the facts ma'am, just the facts, or something like that.
I mean, there is a lot of extremely useful explanation in this book, but, it's like, he's mainly filling in a lot of the low level pieces of the puzzle, and some of the medium level ones as well.
As for the high level, the big picture, what it all means in terms of "were humans designed for harming each other, as a built-in part of our behavior system", OR, "were humans designed for an entirely cooperative system, in which the last ten thousand years of war and horror is just a weird anomaly, something that went wrong socially (Not genetically), and is to be socially fixed and put right" - on that issue, he just avoids it for now. Or so it seems to me.
Frankly, I thought, and still think his "Lucy" book was really hot - he seemed to know exactly what he was after, and why, but now, firmly established and widely famous, he seems a little less brash than earlier on.
It's kind of funny; I feel like I get brasher and brasher as I learn more and more and get older and older, but he seems to be going the other way, although maybe I'm just imagining that.
Anyway, I liked this book a lot. The couple of hundred pictures of the skulls and other finds, and the descriptions of them - some technical but mostly entirely readable, most of them actual size - are a knock-out, very well done.
All and all, he provides a very strong, graphic look at a cross-section of some of the major hard evidence in the field.
This appears to be, like "Refugee Women" (see above), another UN/NGO type manual for field workers who deal directly with these problems on the international level. (April 29)
It is written from the perspective of the various international treaties that have been negotiated and signed by almost every nation in the world. I had no idea that there are almost five hundred conventions, protocols, treaties, and such that have been generated by the international community specifically protecting the rights of women and children.
So what's the problem? Could it be that there is a general public recognition that these conditions, which are destroying everyone's lives, must be arrested, while the most powerful persons actually think that a maintenance and even worsening of these conditions are actually in their interest?
I mean, I'm certainly aware that human desperation and torment is in NO ONE'S interest, but I suspect that the high level corporate chieftains and their technicians are not exactly with me on that.
I guess my main problem with all this, is that so much human rights materials look upon the immediate perpetrators as the perpetrators and seem to think that higher level persons, in governments and corporations are "turning a 'blind' eye" to the situation. But I don't think the problem is that they don't see.
I think that there are multi-national finance and corporate reasons driving all these torments and holding them in place.
These companies are being pressured to pay attention to the situation, but, well, as I see it, they are paying attention to the situation, and that's exactly why we have the problem!
I think more attention needs to be paid to why the multi-national corporations believe it to be in their interest to keep so much of the world's people in a state of utter desperation and despair.
The problem is often presented as originating with a local perpetrator wanting to rape, or exploit, or oppress, or the multi-nationals simply wanting cheap labor or resources, so they can make more money.
But I think there's more to it than that. With all the talk of the idea of popular, communist revolution being dead, or something like that, I myself have concluded that everyone is born a communist, and was designed, through evolution to remain that way throughout life, and that the large scale denizens of finance capital think that they must keep everyone in a desperate state, not only to make more money in the moment, but, and even more important,
to keep them from developing the security, the education, the secure attachments, and the confidence that would allow them to form intelligent, popular organizations that would change towards justice, the entire dynamic of the societies in which they live.
I am certainly entirely in favor of exerting massive pressures to get governments and corporations to pay attention to enforcing the many human rights agreements world-wide. And I am certainly in favor of all work at the ground level to assist any and all women towards alleviating the torments that they are being faced with.
But I do think there is something important, some important ideological work, that is sorely missing from the whole human rights field. It's a serious problem, as best I can tell.
Anyway, this book is a fairly good overview of some of the difficulties currently being faced, and of the current state of the international community's official attempts to address these matters.
Regarding this sort of subject, I usually prefer books by persons who write with a muted, albeit powerful background rage regarding what happened to the 'disappeared', imbedded in their reporting, but this book looks perhaps a bit cold for my tastes . . . but it does seem to be so to the point . . . the culture of archetype bourgeois (alleged) denial; my (metaphoric) brothers and sisters the targets - my age, my ideology, my profession, my generation - in those days I felt like the shadow on the wall, still do, really . . . but this is the confessions of a torturer - a little too flat I suspect, but anyway, I saw a mint condition hardcover on sale for two bucks . . . couldn't resist . . . so, we'll see what he's got to say . . . April 29
Books Read In
This was written by a former West Point professor of Philosophy and Ethics (!!), and includes a chapter entitled: "Why Johnny Can't Kill". Apparently, the book documents the difficulties that military instructors have had in attempting - extremely often unsuccessfully - to get soldiers to actually fire their weapons in battle. So much for "man, the natural born killer". Well, I haven't read it yet but it looks like a fascinating approach. -- June 3
-- June 17
In fact, Col. Grossman states explicitly, that when a citizen-soldier is given standard military training, given a rifle, and marched into battle to directly face opposing, armed and shooting, citizen-soldiers, the vast majority will not fire, or will deliberately miss. Of that small proportion - ten or twenty percent - who do accurately fire, the vast majority of them will come away with serious psychiatric problems as the result of the experience. And, and Grossman states this explicitly, those very very small percentage of citizen-soldiers who have an easy, or even delightful time directly killing opposing soldiers were psychopaths, and insane to begin with. (His terms, my italics.)
Well, anyway, this seems to be turning out to be a very good book, with much perspective that is both much welcome and new to me.
-- June 28
Grossman gives a very brief outline regarding what has been thought to be the reason for psychiatric casualties among combat soldiers in, and immediately after battle. I've thought about this before, notably in reading Harry Stack Sullivan's recounting of his work with World War I veterans suffering "Shell Shock", and in reading Judith Herman's book "Trauma and Recovery", among others. But Grossman adds a new, and very important dimension; as far as I can tell, Grossman solves the real source of the combat-trauma riddle once and for all. And although I presume he doesn't mention it, it may have, once removed, some major implications for "Gulf War Syndrome" as well.
Apparently, up until World War I, it was thought that soldiers who didn't fire well in battle, who sought to escape firing on enemy soldiers were, simply, cowards. Less then men. First and foremost, it was said, such persons are afraid of being killed, and it was claimed that fear for their own safety was the only reason for non-performance on the killing fields.
In World War I, a new sort of thinking developed. The problem was said to be not cowardice, but rather "shell-shock". It was said that the constant boom of artillery everywhere, shells exploding all around, the constant smells, sounds, and sight of blood and guts and death everywhere would be enough to drive any strong, brave man to insanity. Definitely closer to the truth than the old 'cowardice' routine.
In World War II, a still higher level understanding developed among psychiatrists. This was that the most severe trauma of combat developed when a soldier saw his friends and buddies killed around him, and felt helpless and even worthless at being unable to do anything to save them, maybe even feeling it was one's own weakness that caused their friends death. A very powerful bond develops between men in combat, each often risking their lives to save their comrades in battle, and when one finds oneself surrounded by dead comrades, it can be psychiatricly devastating.
Grossman takes the matter one step further, I think kind of finally hitting the nail on the head, so to speak (bad metaphor maybe, hopefully I'll change it later). Anyway, he concludes that the real problem for citizen-soldiers (as opposed to the tiny percentage who like killing, who he calls "psychopaths"), the real problem for citizen-soldiers is man's natural, instinctive aversion for killing his fellow man in the first place.
According to Grossman, based on his careful reading of the historical military literature, and based on laser simulations of Civil War firing lines done at the Pentagon, as well as extensive interviews with soldiers of many recent wars, citizen-soldiers have never been easily willing to kill opponents that they could see, even when they themselves were being fired upon in formal, uniformed combat. And those few who have been able to bring themselves to do it, can be presumed to have had, in almost all cases, severe psychiatric difficulties as a result of the experience.
In other words, in that most famous of all examples of "man the killer", cold-blooded, formal WAR!, the centerpiece of the whole "man-is-a-killer" theory, as it turns out, ninety percent refuse to fire, eight percent fire and suffer severe psychiatric breakdown as a result, and two percent are psychopaths to begin with. As a matter of research, and military research at that, as best I can tell, all this is new, and important.
I must add a bit of a hostile note regarding the section on "atrocities". One might wonder how this guy gets along so well at the Pentagon, how he can get to be an instructor at West Point, how it comes to be that he shares a speaking platform with the likes of William Westmoreland and other Pentagon officials, how he can get through Army Ranger School, and the other half dozen of the top Army schools and academies of the US and Britain that he's been to as student or instructor. all while speaking this "killing is out of synch with the human character" line.
The answer is, in part, that he sticks to the Pentagon/CIA line about politics. The bad guys are HitlerandtheCommunists. And theJapaneseandtheVietnamese. Or TheNazisandTheJapanese, or some such. And the central atrocity story - can you guess? Black African men raping and torturing white European women. I was at least grateful that he mentioned that the men were from Moise Tshombe's Katangese army. Having been around in those days, I do recall that the Tshombe's Katagans were employees of the Union Minere mining organization of Belgium, working in consort with the CIA to destroy the democratically elected, progressive government of Patrice Lumumba, and keep the wealth of the Congo flowing to Europe. Thus, the defining feature of the atrocity-doers in his story was not that they were black, or that they were representative of people fighting for Africans or Africa, but quite the contrary, that they were people employed by, trained by, and fighting for the European and US corporations. In this particular case, their job, as defined by their high level employers, was to whip up the sort of anti-black racial fervor that plays so well in the Capitalist press, and thereby whip up still more support for the "plunder-Africa" forces of Europe and the US.
(By the way, the fact that atrocity can 'snap back' to discredit the perpetrators, is a point that Grossman would heartily agree with - he makes that point himself. That they can sometimes be staged, as part of a misattribution propaganda plan, is a matter that he does not approach.)
Anyway, when speaking of the big bad atrocity-makers of the world, there is no mention of the last 500 years of the European/Americans roaming the world, burning, looting, raping, enslaving, poisoning on the grand scale, and killing en mass everything they touched on every continent, near and far and wide. No mention (so far) of the US Army "School Of The Americas" which specifically and explicitly trains thousands and thousands of Latin Americans in the explicit, specific techniques of atrocity, and pays them to go back home, murder their democratically elected countrymen, and then launch the most profoundly unspeakable campaigns against the best and the brightest of their own country, torturing and killing by the thousands, indeed by the millions. And no mention of the scores of grand-scale instances of atrocities to be found in Blum's book "Killing Hope", the perpetrators being corporate/US/bourgeois forces.
In short, 95% of the atrocities of the last 500 years, very much including the last 100 years, has been perpetrated by the capitalist/bourgeois of Europe and the US, against the communist peoples and non-white peoples of the world, whereas with most of the atrocities that he chooses to mention, it's the other way around.
I also can't help but notice that in discussing World War II, in The West, he talks about "The Nazis", and "Hitler" (not the "The Germans") and gives an example of "The Good German" who refused to kill - but regarding The Pacific War, he talks about "The Japanese". Readers of this bibliography will recall, (see John Dower, "Race and Power in The Pacific War", above) that that matches the racial slant of WWII propaganda: in Europe we were fighting "the Nazis", whilst keeping in mind that there were "good Germans", while in The Pacific, the Japanese people were portrayed as uniformly bestial.
While I know all about Nanking, have read Hicks' "The Comfort Women", and was practically raised on Japanese army atrocities against the communists and the Chinese in Manchuria (reading Belden among others), since reading Dower's book, I have developed an acute sensitivity to any sign of 'Japan-bashing' as has become sometimes vogueish in America, certainly as regards the Japanese people. It's not that I have any Japanese friends, or anything like that; I don't. It's just that after reading Dower's book, I felt a little betrayed by my own blindness to the effect on my thinking of the anti-japanese US military propaganda of World War II, and consequently I suppose, I have developed a special sensitivity on the subject.
Well, I don't know why exactly that I feel so compelled to point out that 'atrocity' section in particular of Grossman's book. I guess it's because I do very highly recommend this book, Col. Dave Grossman's "On Killing", and I feel it's important to mention that while Grossman has excellent clues about the psychiatry of the matter, which is what the book is about, when it comes to left-right politics, not really his field, he simply repeats the going propaganda. But again, this book is not about left-right politics (not directly anyway); it's about combat psychiatry, and as such, again, it is (so far) an excellent book. After all, if I only read or recommended books that I was even 90% in agreement with, well, to be frank, I would have almost nothing to read.
The last third of the book, which I haven't read yet, seems to be about "Killing In Vietnam", and about "Killing in America: What Are We Doing To Our Children". I presume this last is about some sort of comparison regarding how US soldiers were finally trained, 90% of them, to actually fire in Vietnam, and the relation between those training films and current mass media "entertainment" faire. But I'm not sure; as I said, I haven't read it yet. But I certainly am looking forward to it.
Anyway, best I can tell so far, this is an important book, and definitely recommended.
I haven't read this yet, but, well, I still want to find out about that hyoid bone (helps regulate speech muscles, or something like that). Apparently, that's an almost sure-fire indication of articulate speech. So far, it appears that there is absolute evidence of articulate language going back only about forty thousand years, well within our own species time. But there's some evidence that articulate speech goes back to Neanderthal - that would be 150,000 years - and even some evidence that that hyoid goes back as much as 300,000 years.
Frankly, I would like it to turn out to be the case that articulate speech paralleled the general growth in brain size - going back two million years would be very convenient. But Johanson mentions that, in those days, Homo Habilis spent thousands of generations making exactly the same kind of tools, which would seem to indicate that they were not talking very much, at least not as we know it. Ok ok. I'll settle for one million years back . . .
It matters to me, because I have a very very simple way of explaining exactly what went wrong (ten-thousand years ago) if it turns out to be true that when language became available, it became useful to have more brain, and more brain made it very useful to have more language - so the two facilities evolved in tandem; each facility making it especially useful to have more of the other. If that turns out to be the case, as a matter of the paleoanthropological record, then my simplest explanation for what went wrong so much later, in our own time, works like a charm.
Well anyway, I decided to read this Ian Tattersall book, in large part because Donald Johanson, who is still my favorite scientist in this field, recommends it extremely highly. -- June 3
I've been a regular reader of another women's journal, "Off Our Backs", (located in DC), since the days of its inception at a house in Chevy Chase where I was staying at the time almost thirty years ago, and although it has definitely become a permanent component of my internal gridwork, it often seems so narrow in its approach, even brittle. "Sojourner", a Boston publication, is perhaps a bit less global, but I find it to be enormously practical, intelligently and thoughtfully written, and, for me anyway, a refreshing assembly of ideas. In recent years, I've basically starting relying on it more and more, especially since the extremely tragic 1995 demise of my absolutely favorite publication in the field, which was "Connexions", of Berkeley. Anyway, I found the articles on Prozac in this Sojourner issue to be very informatively helpful, and much of it new to me.
CAQ: Covert Action Quarterly, Winter, 1998; No. 63; 52 pages
This is another magazine I've been reading regularly for decades, and I've generally considered it to be an excellent remnant, perhaps the main holdover of the old, sixties tradition - highly relevant, otherwise unavailable information, pointedly stated, with, specifically a solution-type purpose. As best I can tell, aspects of the "secret-toxin laboratory under Apartheid" article that I'd read in an earlier issue, showed up grotesquely in events in Nigeria about a week after I'd read it. Typical. Stuff I read here tends to stay with me in the library in my mind for a long long time, and often shows up usefully in all kinds of other contexts.
In These Times: Independent News & Views; June 14, 1998; Vol. 22, No 14; 40 pages
Extra: The Magazine of FAIR May/June, 1998; Volume 11, Number 3; 28 pages
The Nation July 6, 1998; Volume 267, Number 1; 48 pages
In Process - July 1998
Books Being Read In
I liked this book. Actually, kind of a lot. At first, it seemed a bit improbable, and I didn't know quite what to make of it.
The first third of the book seemed almost a little like a Craighead-George story, except instead of a child making her way through the Florida Everglades or the Alaskan tundra, these four children find themselves trudging through the badlands of the Connecticut suburbs. Their mother has abandoned them in a shopping mall parking lot, and the four of them, led by thirteen year old Dicey, attempt to find their own way to an aunt in faraway Bridgeport, walking almost the whole way, through fields, down roads and tracks, navigating rivers, fishing at beaches for food, carrying people's groceries at stores for quarters, and sleeping in bushes and parks and little hideaways that they find. At one point, they have to walk across New Haven, and I couldn't help but wonder if someone at the college there would get a clue. And sure enough, for a brief moment anyway.
But then, when they get to a first destination, there's talk of charity, splitting them up, and a priest talks of a school for the retarded for one, and a disciplinary institution for another. At that point, as one might imagine, I was hooked for sure, as Dicey, with help from her eleven year old brother steers them onward. Dicey, as it turns out, is very cool. And, most important, she has good maps, in her head and her gut, as well as in her pocket.
As I'm a pretty slow reader, I usually take weeks and weeks reading a book, usually reading three or four simultaneously (the Human Rights Watch Report is taking me months), but this time, I found myself reading this straight through all at once, in just three days time. Kind of a welcome break from most of the stuff I'm reading this summer. From what I understand this was the author's first novel, and I think there's a sequel which I'm looking forward to, but I'll leave that for later, next year maybe. Anyway, Homecoming turned out to be a good book.
After I'd finished reading this book, I decided I liked it. The first third is a description of a desperately impoverished, and brutally beaten down group of peasants in a little town in the Andes highlands where the author, an American journalist, lived for about a while. It was a bit long on descriptions of form, for me anyway; perhaps it's a literary style, I can't tell. But I have read a lot about the extreme desperation among Peruvian peasants, and this part of the book provided some welcome background material.
But about halfway through there is a chapter, "Recorded in Stone", that tells of her interviews with several different senderistas, women of The Shining Path, which was more or less what I came for. And it is a fascinating chapter.
I'd always considered The Shining Path, with their primary emphasis being on "anti", "destroy", and "kill", and on rote memorization as 'learning', as antithetical to what I understand communism to be.
The methodologies that The Shining Path uses, and the social and political context therein created in the society at large, seems so close to the right-wing social ideal - the "follow", "believe", "react" mode that so seamlessly engenders the bourgeois frame of mind.
As far as I can tell, the internal human operations of "assembling-many-different-factors, figuring-out, and reaching-accurate-and-helpful-conclusions" is the mode of thinking that everyone was, via evolution, specifically designed for.
"Anti/Destroy/Kill/Destabilize" methodologies and strategies, as high level framework, engender directly the "follow/believe/react" mode of (alleged) "thinking" in the population.
"Follow/believe/react" is specifically the mode of thinking required for fascism, and the nazis seem to know it so damn well;
"Assemble/figure/conclude" is specifically the mode of thinking required for communism, and the left seems so damned in the blue.
And that "assemble/figure/conclude" methodology specifically is wherefrom derives communism's long-standing status as a specifically scientific system.
It's all so strange - the fascists know exactly which thinking processes to kill among the population at large, and exactly how to go about killing them, that is, how to create the economic, political, social, and interactional context that keeps everyone in a mode of blind reaction.
But the leftists are so in the blue about which thinking processes to build, and how to create the context for building them. It's just so weird. I mean here, as well as there. (For more on the contrast between the "follow/believe/react", reactionary mode of operations and the "assemble, figure, conclude". communist mode of operations see the '92 Paradigm Summary, elsewhere at this site.)
Well, anyway, all that is just what goes around in my mind when I read books like this. Robin doesn't get into it all that much, at that level anyway, or even at all - her story is a more 'on the ground'. But she does give some brief history of Peru going back to late Inca times and also the 500 years since the European invasions, which provides some helpful context.
Anyway, there is another chapter later on, which tells of the struggles of some of the disappeared and their parents and friends, and includes some very gripping stories from among the thousands in Peru. All in all, I guess I'm deciding that I like this book. It's certainly good background material.
Books Read In
This story is set in 12th century Japan. It starts out telling of the exquisitely delicate lives of four sisters, daughters of a noble Japanese judge in the Imperial Court. Tragedy falls upon the family however, and it falls upon young Mitsu to follow the course to solution.
And therein begins her journey, most of which is told in a style that I've come to call 'fantasy based fiction". Mitsu comes to ride on the back of a creature, who is sometimes a bird, flying across the mountains and valleys, and sometimes takes the form of a human; she meets her long-gone ancestors in their current habitat, and she also meets other-worldly folks who register persons who've died, for their admittance to their next destination. She meets the Storm King, and also a youthful manifestation of the Buddha, and gets harrowing clues and good assistance from each of them. After a time, she returns to complete her mission.
Frankly, I don't know quite what to make of 'fantasy-based fiction' like this. I realize these are metaphors for things that are quite real and important, but I don't know quite how to put it together, or just what it means.
I mean, the bird-like creature, for example, the tengu, who sometimes appears in the form of a bird, and sometimes appears in the form of a human, is generally seen as a demon of some sort. But he becomes Mitsu's friend. First he is thought of as a demon, then as a friend, and then they become very good friends.
Now, I have read, in many different books recently, that there is good reason to believe that Neanderthals and Sapiens lived essentially side by side for sixty thousand years. Furthermore, as I understand it, throughout the whole five million year history of our evolution, it is now understood to have probably been common for two, or three, or more, "cousin" species, along the Homo lines, to have lived, side by side over thousands, or even tens of thousands of generations.
I understand that Ian Tattersall recently wrote a book about Neanderthal, which I'd like to read (maybe next year), but he does give some fascinating summaries regarding that subject in the two other books of his which I've just completed. And he mentions that it remains something of a mystery as to just why Neanderthals are no longer with us. After sixty thousand years of compatible living, and with what was quite possibly a millions years long previous history of parallel, contemporaneous living between various pre-human species,** there is, certainly in my mind, absolutely no reason to believe there was some sort of "battle", or "competition" between the species. Such notions are only the product of the twisted - and anti-nature - framework of modern capitalism, unknown prior to about ten thousand years ago, and certain not a basic pattern of biological structure or genetic development. So what was the scoop about Neanderthal/Sapiens relations anyway - and whatever did become of them?
[ ** Note - There was an obvious typographical error in this paragraph when I first posted it - stating that Sapiens and Neanderthals were in the millions of years old. In fact, Neanderthals go back starting about 200k years and Sapiens about 100k - nm]
Somehow I wonder if the relationship of the girl in this book to the tengu, might be some sort of metaphor for a time in long-remembered history, thousands of generations ago, when there were creatures who were, in important ways, hauntingly the same as Sapiens, while, fundamentally different - in some ways handier, and in some ways less articulate. For all I know, there may have been, at some times, Sapiens, Neanderthals, Heidlebergis, Ergaster, and even Erectus, all oddly crossing paths from time to time, and living side by side from time to time, all hearing strange tales of one another. Could it be, that some ancient stories of human-like creatures originated in fact as actual reports, and passed down for thousands of generations? I mean, I don't really know if it's possible for that sort of "germ" of truth to actually survive the retelling, over thousands and thousands of generations, it just doesn't seem possible, but maybe it is; I'm not sure.
And the bird part - I remember Gimbutas noting (in "Civilization of the Goddess") that, prior to the last seven thousand years or so, it was commonly done, at least in some civilizations, for a close-knit group to, after any loved person dies, especially any close family member, lay out their body in the open, while the group sits away somewhat, and watches the birds carry its flesh up to the sky. That's certainly enough to leave a powerful impression regarding just where one goes under such circumstances, and just "who" birds are in the scheme of things.
Anyway, the process was called "excarnating" the body, I think. The bones would then be gathered and buried deep under the sleeping quarters, as a kind of metaphoric pillow, all so that what the person had done, and remembered, and been, would be powerfully remembered, and would be fully integrated into present and future persons. Birds carry off part of the person's body into everyone's sky, and their bones rest nearby, just underground. What could be more closely and permanently present . . . the extrasomatic infrastructure of powerful, long-term memory . . .
So anyway, whatever did become of the Neanderthals? There's a line in this book ("Little Sister") about a tengu wondering if he should do things that would dampen the tengu part of him but might allow him, in the next life, to come back, not as a magician, but as a human.
I remember a line from Lewis Thomas . . . he noticed that, after a fire, a certain sort of bush grows in a burned out area of the forest. It nurtures the soil as it grows, and then the trees can also grow, and then the roots become intertwined, and finally, with little sun falling on the forest floor, under the tall trees, the bush "bows out", having done its job, and its own progeny, its configuration, moves on to other areas. He mentioned something like, that some people think of it as the big, strong, dominating, aggressive and brutal trees, strangling and starving out the bushes below (capitalist-style), but he mentioned that it didn't seem that way to him.
The question arises as to whether these are two "equally valid" "interpretations", or, whether one description is accurate to science, accurate to nature, and accurate to singular reality, and the other description is untrue, false, inaccurate, in no way in conformity to anything resembling a major pattern of nature.
As the reader can probably guess, I have come to the conclusion that the "strangulation" description in the example above bears no relation to reality, and the cooperation description in fact conforms to reality. Words like "strangle", "starve", "dominating", "brutal", are explicitly meant as specifically destructive and viscous operations. When one does those things among humans, which is the association with those words that everyone makes, one is creating a serious deficit among all life, harming, damaging to all life; both our emotions, and mathematics show us that. But in the example of the forest above, "strangle", "dominate", "kill", is not what's going on at all. In that context, neither the emotions, nor the mathematics, nor the damage associated with "strangle", "dominate", "kill", as those words are commonly understood - those patterns are simply not present.
Nature, is, to a ninety-nine-plus percent degree, a cooperative, work well together, mutually nutritive affair. Unlike this diseased little anomaly, this deranged capitalist/bourgeois system,
that can and should be cured forthwith. It is certainly one of the great tragedies of our time (severe understatement) that so many
But anyway, whatever did become of the Neanderthals?
In process August, 1998
in process
This is turning out to be a pretty good book. The problem is though, that it's not that clearly written; the most important parts anyway.
When I first saw it on the shelf of Modern Times Bookstore, I thought to myself: "yeah, 'Betrayal Trauma', that does sum up a lot of things". I mean, really, is there any other kind of psychological trauma? Combat trauma, child-abuse trauma, rape trauma, untimely-loss trauma, torture trauma, accident trauma . . . it seems like they're all a matter of "getting the rug pulled out from under a person" - a "violation of the human contract" as they say in Latin America, a contract for which the blueprints have been engraved in every human's behavioral system for five million years, and present in nature for a billion. The major violation of so much of the basis by which we all, by nature, operate.
Freyd's idea (maybe I'm adding some of my own stuff to this summary, but I think this is essentially what she's saying) - Freyd's idea is that every person, most starkly obviously every child, is dependent upon their primary attachment figures, or more powerful persons generally to get the protection that they need to survive. Thus, every person must operate in a way that keeps that above-figure protecting them. If the above-figure does things that show that above figure to be a harmful person, then the
At any rate, while her idea is, in my view, correct, helpful, relevant, and new, her writing style falls into the ambiguity and unclarity style that is so standard in far too much professional writing in the "communications/interactive-psychiatry/cognitive-psychology" fields. They all write that way, and it's kind of a pain in the neck, but very often the information and ideas, if you have the patience to chip away at the encrustation, are very useful.
One example of the problem is her handling of the concepts of "repression" and "disassociation". She goes over the various different definitions of these terms that other writers have used, along with several related terms, all of which is a very welcome, updated review of the field. But then she doesn't give a specific definition that she herself is going to use for the terms. If you're going to give 9 different ways that people use a word, that word being central to one's whole thesis, and then you don't get real specific about your own definition of the word, but still use it over and over again - well, it just gets very confusing to read.
The author could say "For the purposes of this book, the term repression shall mean 'the location wherein some information/memories are locked-away from consciousness and conscious processing'"; a location on one side of an neural-electro "gate". On one side of the gate, things are exclusively unconscious and "repressed", and on the other side of the gate, information is reasonably freely available to consciousness.
Or, it could take the form of: "When used in this book unqualified, the term disassociation shall mean 'the process by which information/memories are directed away from consciousness, across to the repressed side of the gate".
Thus, in this example definition, "repression" is a location, on the non-conscious side of a neuro-electro gate, a gate that has been built by other portions of the central nervous system, and "disassociation" is the process by which information moves across that "gate" into the location called repression. Sort of a one-way gate - the information/memory can get in, but it can't get out, well not easily anyway.
If these definitions were employed, then the sentence "the perception was disassociated into repression" would make perfect sense, although, depending on the context, it might be redundant.
But, by these same specific definitions, the sentence "the perception was repressed into disassociation" would make absolutely no sense at all, would be just a nonsense collection of words. By this specific definition that is, of course.
I mean, you can 'drive the car', but you can't really 'car the drive', I mean, not if the definitions and context stays the same.
Anyway, once those definitions are clearly established (IF they are indeed clear, practical, and easily understood), then one can then freely and confidently use the word 'disassociation' when talking about a process, a movement, a pathway along which some information/memory passes, and the word 'repression' when talking about that same information/memory staying in a specific constant location, or constant state.
For one thing, then when describing how other authors use the word, readers have a grounded, constant definition to measure by, for contrast, which is very helpful for clarifying alternative uses of the word.
For another thing, when assembling the theoretical puzzle towards a concise and accurate higher level conclusion, one has very precise and clear pieces of the puzzle to work with, to assemble. It just makes accurate assembly much easier when you know, and can clearly explain just exactly what the puzzle pieces look like.
I'm not saying that the author would find that the definitions that I made up in the above paragraphs would be useful, if she read them - they're not her definitions, they're the ones I thought of while reading her book. But I'm just using them as an example . . . But then again, I suppose it could be that maybe she did define these terms, and after reading her definitions I sort of partly, sort of, disassociated it, and when the idea came (back) into my consciousness, the ID tag was missing . . . so I just presumed . . .
But all that be as it may, Jennifer Freyd has brought together many threads into a simple, accurate, highly relevant and extremely useful conclusion. That is, that the common thread for all psychological trauma is being betrayed. With that established, it then becomes much easier to find out why the phenomenon is there and what overall solving process it's supposed to serve.
I mean maybe I could have gotten it down to a thousand words, if called upon; but she got it down to just two "Betrayal Trauma" . . . 'name that system', so to speak. At least for my purposes, certainly, that's very helpful, and I thank her for it.
Note: I wrote the above when I was only about half way through the book. Actually, the second half, which I expected to be just studies showing what circumstances constituted 'betrayal', actually turned out to not be that exactly, but rather tracing, to at least some degree, exactly what cognitive/memory effect, and what effect on specific mental processing facilities that betrayal trauma has. I feel a little silly as I wrote the whole above when I was only half-way though and the second half, turned out to the major punchline of the book, for my purposes anyway. I did find it to be very new to me and extremely useful-to-me research.
In process, August 12, 1998
This is turning out to be an incredibly fascinating book. In a certain way, the subject is a profoundly important chapter in "The History of Science". With all the books I've read on the Holocaust, I had no idea that the front line people, the 'mechanics' and ideologists driving the genocide program from the start were doctors. The medical profession in general and doctors in particular were the ones who originally, and throughout, certified the mass killings, as fully in accord with the principles of biological science and unquestionably medically indicated.
Actually, the first quarter or so was the most new, and eye-opening to me, and the most useful; the bulk of the book, the middle two thirds or so, was specifically about "medical" practices and operations at Auchwitz in particular, which seemed to be an almost endless description of just a couple of specific nazi doctors and their 'work', and the last hundred pages, I found to be a bit too Freudian-like for my tastes. Still and all, the entire book provides an incredibly valuable service regarding illuminating much about the medical profession, not only then and there, but, unintended perhaps, in all Western medicine, and professionalism for that matter, very much including contemporary America as well.
First, to the crackpot 'science' part. I have long since concluded that life in general, this bioecosystem, operates on a "logical levels" type of system, in which many 'low level' elements are organized together into a single 'higher level' system. As mentioned in an early part of the "Schema" paper elsewhere at this site, many "high level" systems coalease together, and because there are many, they themselves become 'low level' elements in a still "higher level" system, and on and on. Low level elements coalese together into a high level system - many systems together themselves coalese into a still higher level system, and so forth. 'Low level', 'high level', 'the connection between them'; it's all very mathematical (as first articulated by Betrand Russell and Alfred North Whitehead a hundred years ago) and all very scientific - entirely cognitive, entirely understandable, entirely reason-based, entirely five-senses based, entirely provable by all the standard rules of hard science.
But for the Germans, there is no science at the high level. They, like the right wing everywhere "conclude" that there is no science at the high level, the system level, the overall level. So, they take some little 1% piece of the low level of things, some small disease-like interaction, and announce that that "must be" just like the high level. Of course, when transferred to the high level, the system level, it bears no relation whatsoever to science. So, they then declare that since there is no science at the high level, they then fabricate some mystical, overtly satanic web of alleged myths, about the "German volk", in competition with other peoples, and claim that since there is no real science, this mystical anti-science, must be the equivaliant of science. Thus, they proclaim to the world that their system is all very scientific, but their actual writings reveal that they are well aware that the actual high level basis contains no science whatsoever, and is in fact an extreme anti-science basis.
Again, I must remind the reader that it is not true that there is no science at the high level of life. There most certainly is! This bioecosystem operates, as a scientifically provable matter - absolute science - on a cooperative "work-out-well-for-all" basis. But when the right-wing gets up to that high level, and sees that their "work-out-poorly-for-some-or-most-or-all" basis bears no conformity with science whatsoever, they simply declare that there is no science up there anyway, so they say "so let's call 'mystical satanism' science"!! It's classic "Orwellean" stuff.
Tragically, in fact, it's not so far from what was adopted in other Western countries. There are many in England and the U.S., who've taken this matter into another twist, namely the "sociobiologists", and "behaviorists". They declare that the low level is the high level, that they are one in the same, and therefore come up with overall "theories" that in fact conform in many ways to the high level nazi stuff.
In France, there is another tactic still: namely, that, well there is a high level, sure, but we can't know what it is, so we may as well just presume that this or that low level "reaction" is as close as can be figured as to what life's all about. I think that was called existentalism, "can't know", or something like that; I'm not sure, I'm not much of a scholar on the various convolutions that the right-wing uses to mumble away the fact that they are operating on a fundementally crackpot, anti-science basis.
Then again there is the famous (infamous) American approach. The Americans snort a hit of cocaine, and ahhhhh, declare, that that's the high level! The, sort of, "life is but a joke" school of thought.
These, of course, are all different ways of avoiding the obvious, namely that there is indeed science at the high level of life, at the overall system level, and all up and down the logical levels as well, and scientific method and thinking shows that this bioecosystem is a "work-out-well-all-around", cooperative, frankly, communist system. Naturally, when a nazi runs across that, he will rapidly dump science, claim that science cannot exist at that level, and substitute an overtly mystical satanism.
Well, only the part about Germany is in the book; the rest just occurred to me as I was reading . . . But it was, in fact, Lifton's reporting of the nazi crackpot 'science', that is, pseudoscience or anti-'science' under which the Germans were operating, that provided the most telling clues, for me anyway.
A little later on in the book, Lifton starts getting into the mechanics of the mass killings which began with a 'prelude' to the wholesale Holocaust - namely, "mercy" (sic) killings, "euthanasia", 'psychiatric' gassings, and such.
Somehow it had escaped me that the gas chambers, literally, had been rolling for thousands and thousands of political dissidents - under the transparent guise of them being "incurable" schizophrenics, or depressives, or whatever - from before the invasion of Austria, from before Munich and Czechoslovakia. A doctor would refer a patient, who perhaps was exhibiting some hostility among their family, or at work, to a psychiatrist for an examination. The psychiatrist would then fill out a form, and send it of to the Chancellery. If the form had the magic words "schizophrenia", or "depressive", or "Jewish", or any one of a variety of "anti-social" "diseases", a note would be sent back to the doctor telling him to refer the patient to the hospital for treatment. The patient would then be checked in, be perfunctorily 'examined', referred for "treatment", and be driven in groups to a gas chamber to summarily disposed of. Sort of gives new meaning to the term "going to the doctor's", as in - "you better behave, conform, shut up, or we'll take you to the doctor to see what's wrong." Naturally, it occurred to me that at bottom, the "disease" that the nazis were looking for was what we now call "post traumatic stress disorder". Anyone who showed overt signs of being brutalized, raped, incest, or whatever, anyone who could not overtly suppress a bad reaction to being brutalized by the viscous, dominating relations of German society, was diagnosed "schizophrenic", "depressed", "restless", maybe "character disordered", or some such, and was whisked off to the "mental hospital", and from there, to the gas chambers.
Many families, had of course, taken families to mental hospitals in good faith, actually expecting to see some helpful treatment, and were psychologically destroyed when they slowly learned what was actually going on. But my guess is, that many "patients" were committed by persons who specifically wanted them out of the way.
In fact, the whole thing was supposedly secret, but there were open chimneys at the crematoriums, so surrounding townspeople could smell, literaly, what was going on. And the nurses and aides, sometimes sympathetic to the 'patients' would talk quietly in town. It was, what they call, an "open secret". And as disturbed as the nazis seemed that word was getting around, my guess is that subtly letting on what was going on was something of an experiment to see what they would be allowed to do. When it became clear that neither German society, nor the world would, in fact do anything, they took that as the big-time signal of German and world approval for ever bigger things.
In Process, August, 1998
I originally found this book in a bookstore that I rarely frequent on Ninth Avenue in the Sunset District. While gazing through the children's section, I noticed a young girl, couldn't have been more than nine or ten, looked maybe north Asian or something, intensely thumbing through one book after the next, apparently familiar with many of the titles, and I asked her for a recommendation, asked her to recommend a book that she particularly liked. She asked what I was interested in specifically and when I told her, she looked over the shelves for just a moment and quickly pulled this book and handed it to me; said it was her favorite of those she'd read recently. I started to ask her about it, but just then, a woman suddenly appeared from around the stacks - maybe a teacher or something - and suddenly she was gone, rescued I suppose, from that strange man, maybe, that lunatic (there is, as it turns out, a lunatic in the story). Oh well . . . she did leave me holding the book . . .
I was a little skeptical 'cause something about the cover made it look a little science fictiony, which is a genre that I avoid, but actually that turned out not to be the case. Anyway, I passed it up for the moment, but in another store a few weeks later, a girl and her mom (they were from North Carolina - in San Francisco there are lots of visitors) were avidly discussing a stack of children's books that they were piling up from off the shelves. I managed to get in a short conversation with them, we exchanged favorite titles, and they too mentioned this book. That was it - and I went back a week or two later and bought it. Turns out to be a pretty darn good book.
It was a little strange - for the first eighty percent or so, I couldn't quite figure out just what it was about. I mean, the stories were interesting and everything, sort of, but I just didn't get the point, and I wondered if some books just go on and on aimlessly and never really say anything. But then, after about two hundred pages or so, there's a line: "She knew." Oh. I started crying and crying, and then everything sort of popped out at me. See, it seems to be about this one kid, who's taken a pretty serious loss and is having a hard time of it, but as it turns out . . . oh well . . . it is a pretty good book . . .
Not being too familiar with fiction altogether, I hadn't realized I was reading a mystery story. It occurred to me that maybe it's a little like photography. When I was doing photography (twenty years, very full time), I learned that, the sort of photography that I do, most of the work is in the background, in one way or another. You put all your muscle into the background, which no one really notices, but then, that last little part, the person, the face, just sort of pops out, like it's a natural. The viewer doesn't even know why they like the picture so much, why the person in the picture seems so gorgeous, but the photographer knows, I mean, I did, anyway . . . it's all in the background, one way or another . . . even though it's the part that no one notices . . . maybe research is like that too, sort of . . . maybe a lot of things are like that . . .
Anyway, in the end, I liked this story, quite a lot, and I thank that girl on Ninth Avenue for the recommendation . . .
Books Being Read In
I'm only about halfway through this book, but it's turning out to be a pretty good book, actually very informative. I read another book on this subject about a year or so ago and in that annotation (see Oct. 97 above) I mentioned that I don't really understand enough about mathematics to fully appreciate exactly what's going on. In that other book though, there was a lot about many of the mathematicians who attempted the solution, and something about their struggles, which I found quite interesting, but the math itself seemed quite far over my head.
This book though, it seems to me anyway, presents the math, so far anyway, in a much easier to understand form - there are more equations, but they're more like familiar arithmetic and elementary algebra and I do feel like I understand it a lot better. Maybe he's just explaining it clearer, although maybe, having read the other one, I'm more accustomed to the subject - maybe the author I read last year sort of set me up for understanding this one better - but I can't tell exactly.
Here though, the author talks more about the whole field of mathematics itself, what it's based on, the basic cognitive (and, as I see it anyway, bioecosystemic) principles from which derive the fundamental purpose and equations. He explains, to some degree anyway, how mathematicians understand the field as a matter of "accurate-or-inaccurate" - not a little bit one way or a little bit the other, or mostly one way or mostly the other - no no, but absolutely accurate, 100%, or absolutely inaccurate, forever, and for everyone. Boy, do I ever love that!!! It's easy, for me anyway, to see why mathematicians love the field so much. He talks about proof in chemistry, or physics, running a kind of messy second-place to the absolutely pristine proofs in math. He doesn't even stoop so low as to mentioning proof in biology, or medicine, and, of course, it makes me sorta smile, as you might imagine, to wonder what he'd say about my absolute proofs in the fields of psychiatry, social interaction, and politics.
I do so love to read him talking about absolute, same for everyone, constant for all time proof that does NOT require the presence of any other person to support it, does NOT require the presence of any attachment figure for any person's cognitive mind to absolutely determine accuracy or inaccuracy. That's my idea about what I've found in my field, for sure, for sure!!!, but I seem to be the only one, so far, that is.
Frankly, it is my opinion that mathematicians don't have an exclusive monopoly on absolute proof. But I don't want to argue with this fellow - I'm just enjoying so much reading about how absolutely sure these mathematicians are. I am sure they're right, absolutely correct, and it sure is great fun to watch, sorta makes me tingle a little . . .
The part that I'm at now - about two thirds the way through - he mentions a particular statement that is apparently an important example of one area of math, something like the sentence:
He says (I think) that that's an example of one of those equation-like statements - I think they call it a "paradox" - that cannot be proven one way or the other. After all, it seems to be the case that if it is true, then it's not true; but if it's not true, then it is true. But looking it over, I thought to myself, 'now wait a second . . . I remember something like that from Jay Haley (of "Leaving Home" fame), Greg Bateson, and Paul Watzlawick'. I did spend considerable time on it in my early days of studying psychiatry, back in '83, and I remember I decided, definitively and absolutely, that the statement is untrue, that is, is NOT true, based on using Russell's and Whitehead's "distinction-between-a-class-and-its-members" formulations, and my own idea (I think) about the phrase "a-nonsense-collection-of-words" being something like the semantic equivalent of "divided-by-zero". Is there something I'm seeing that he's missing??? Him and all them way up-there mathematicians??? Could it be??? Nah . . . 'course not . . .
Oh well . . . All this talk of Fermat and Wiles, and cracking the seemingly uncrackable, after centuries of failure, and then, Finally; but then, failure, but then, Finally, Really, Solution!!! So it sort of gets one's mind going a little bit . . . what can I say . . . but, I'm not going to spend a lot of time on trying to sort it through right now, but it is kind of fun though . . . ("Actually, I do have a marvelously simple proof for the apparent paradox above, but . . . " [smile] . . . true enough though . . . but . . . well . . . with Mr. and Mrs. Clinton holding up three billion years of biological development against extinction like the Hercules that they are, and getting ferociously gnawed at, battered, and clawed at by the unbelievably suicidal gnomes from every direction . . . I think I'm supposed to yet again be attempting to consolidate my mountain of notes on the subject . . . despite massive life-threatening, literal starvation and an absolutely overwhelming, extremely crippling, mind-and-soul-numbing isolation . . . well, another little apparent 'paradox' there . . . it takes three to make a system; even two just won't do it . . . but one??? all alone??? it's all so unreal . . . )
Anyway, also, there's a lot of fascinating history in this "Fermat's Enigma" book - Pythagorous, Euclid, and that mind-boggling Library of Alexandria . . . All and all, this book seems quite fascinating, more or less relevant, to the big things, anyway, and somehow, very easy to read. (September 10, 1998)
I've long made it a point to studiously avoid reading anything that could even remotely be called "science fiction", and that has included the children's books that I've been reading for the last year or two, but in asking for recommendations at children's bookstores, this book came so highly recommended again and again that I just thought - oh, what the heck . . . The last gal I asked about books (at A Clean Well Lighted Place for Books Bookstore on Van Ness Ave.), I mentioned, "well, I avoid science fiction and fantasy-type stuff", but she replied - "so do I, except for this one . . ." Ok, ok. Since she was the same person that pointed out "The Dragon in the Cliff" and a couple of others that I liked a lot, I figured I might as well sort of give in and read at least something of this genre . . . just to see how it goes . . .
. . .
Ok, I read it . . . and . . . well, I really don't know quite what to make of this book. Again, it's a genre I guess I call "fantasy-based fiction", more or less written for young people, and it's basically the first of this type I've read - of this length and complexity anyway. The characters certainly are charming - Lyra, an eleven year old girl at the center of it all, a gypsy-like people, scholars and priests and plotters, bears that think and act in an almost human-like fashion, a small tool from which Lyra finds out things, and lots more, and the story certainly is adventurous and exciting. Quite well written too, as best I can tell.
In this story, each person has a constant companion, throughout life, sort of like "Hobbs" from "Calvin and Hobbs", that can change form at will - a bird, a kitten, a butterfly, a monkey, or whatever, which I found kind of fascinating. At a certain point I wondered though, that it seemed unlikely that Lyra can do so well, have so much confidence, be so settled, for someone who doesn't seem to have the presence of a very available, single, stable attachment figure figuring in prominently (there is someone, but she's so in the background), but then again, the constant presence of a personal companion to always talk with and be with, sort of changes the psychodynamics substantially. I kept having to remind myself that this is fantasy-fiction, it's all metaphor, but I still can't help comparing things to literal reality. I mean, the sort of person I am, literal, singular reality is all I know.
Well, there are a lot of things in this story that are kind of difficult for me to know just what to make of. The heroine at the center of the story engages in a lot of 'successful' deceptions, which I can't entirely settle with - unmitigated deception just doesn't sit that well with me. And then there are big battles with people getting killed, children being kidnapped (and rescued, for the most part), alongside some themes regarding the activities of the evil people in the story that are pretty closely reminiscent - the details too close to be coincidental - of "The Nazi Doctors", a book which I just happened, by complete chance, to finish reading just a day or two before I started this one.
And I get the sense that there is some sort of overall framework that the author is working from, of "eternal evil", to be fought against by the forces of good, or something like that - it's never said, but it's a 'framework' sense that I get, and I associate that overall framework not with the childhood frame of reference, but rather with the adult frame of reference. But then, again, I'm so unfamiliar with this type of stuff, that I'm not real sure of myself in talking about this type of book.
I mean in the end, the author does mention some of the big themes that I too work with, but in this case, distant metaphor, just touching on some things. "Dust", meaning consciousness, or something like that, and other things too.
Then, while sitting in a cafe, I read the line:
It's all about some stealth manipulations that the evil princes played upon unwitting persons, so as to unwittingly get them to entrap the good king into an apparently unprincipled deed, and therein frame-up the good king, weaken and exile him, and take over the throne for evil.
Apparently, there was a routine contest that the (good) king routinely has with this or that member of the court, or something like that. In the course of this engagement, at a certain point, the contestant is supposed to acknowledge the high position of the king and back off a bit.
However, unbeknownst to the contestant, the evil court plotters have whispered subliminal things into the contestant's ear, or secretly given the contestant a confusion potion or something like that.
So when it came the moment in the engagement when the contestant is supposed to acknowledge the (good) king's high position, the contestant (unwittingly) failed to do so. The king, suddenly confused and knocked off-balance by the lapse in the (unwitting) contestant, goes too far in response, and the evil plotters suddenly emerge from the shadows screaming Aha!, the king has acted in an unprincipled manner.
They then try him on the (secretly manipulated) charge, and expel him from the kingdom. Then of course, the kingdom, now in the hands of the manipulative plotters, deteriorates into a scummy, paranoid cesspool.
It is not until later, after the kingdom has been bled white by the deranged plotters and destroyed, long after everyone's lives have been turned to rats and terror, that, among those left alive, the true story is whispered about.
I looked up into the newspaper box outside the cafe, and saw the usual current headline about the Ginrich/Lott/Renquist/Starr scandals, and couldn't help but grimace. Archetype! I get the feeling that the Republicans, playing on Miss Lewinsky's insecurities, and whispering into her ear such that Clinton was then entrapped in a way that bounced back through her and into the toady-evil-press, so as to win the throne for the evil manipulators, is one of the constant themes in all classical literature.
Mr. Clinton is obviously the most honest and most principled person of anyone in a high influencial position, as was proven many times over, by Starr himself! The entire background of Republican Party charges was proven, Proven to be absolutely false, which is exactly why the Repbulicans and the media are so desperate to knock him out! And when plotters succeed in knocking out the most principled person, by charging him with their own crimes of lies and and deceptions, life everywhere and for everyone turns ugly and ratty indeed. It's kind of a rule in life; when the best person or persons get knocked out, all situations within the overall realm become profoundly ugly viscious, and physically and emotionally impoverished and reactive all around, for a long time to come. Given the current state of the earth, this time, there may well be no recovery.
It's so very very weird! People love to read about that sort of stuff in fictional materials about ancient this or ancient that, but they claim to not notice the dynamic at all when it when it appears right in front of their face, in the here and now, as literal, present reality!
Maybe that's one reason why people like fantasy-fiction so much; if you read about it in an other-worldly context, why then, you're free to see, while not having any responsibilities to accurately discern or do anything.
But if you read accuracy-based non-fiction about present matters, and you see the same god-damn thing, why then, you're on duty, in the here and now, and you better figure it out accurately or the good things get doomed. Gulp.
So people just stick with the fiction-fantasy, and get all enchanted, and shun discerning accurately and responsibly the situation that they themselves are actually in. Ok, I'll shut up now . . .
Anyway, do I think this is a good book? I guess so - it certainly is kind of fun to read, and there's a lot to it; but I just feel a little too inexperienced in the whole fiction genre to know exactly what I should say about it, or even what I think of it.
This book was yet another recommendation pointed out to me by my favorite bookseller at Modern Times Bookstore (The last two were "Night Market" (prostitution in Thailand), and "A Miracle A Universe" (torture and siege in Uruguay/Brazil) - see annotations elsewhere in this bibliography). Somehow, "Lexicon of Terror" looks, at first glance, like the major, direct hit, especially in this election season. But I don't know where the hell I'm going to get the thirty bucks for it, so I might not actually get to read it anytime soon. It looks like, though, it might be, for me anyway, "the book of the year" (if I do somehow manage to buy it). Oh well . . .
(In Order of how helpful I found them to be - theme titles inserted as spacers)
Dancing on the Edge by Han Nolan (fiction, written for young people) 1997
Green Backlash: Global Subversion of the Environmental Movement by Andrew Rowell 1996
On Killing: The Psychological Cost Of Learning To Kill In War And Society by Lt. Col. Dave Grossman 1995
The Nazi Doctors by Robert Jay Lifton 1986
Survivors: An Oral History of the Armenian Genocide by Donald E. Miller and Lorna Touryan Miller 1993
A Miracle, A Universe: Settling Accounts with Torturers by Lawrence Weschler 1990
The Human Rights Watch Global Report On Women's Human Rights by Human Rights Watch 1995
Bonobo: The Forgotten Ape by Frans De Wall 1997
Young Joan by Barbara Dana (fiction, written for young people) 1991
Homecoming by Cynthia Voigt (fiction, written for young people) 1981
The Dragon in the Cliff by Sheila Cole (fiction, written for young people) 1991
Walk Two Moons by Sharon Creech (fiction, written for young people) 1994
The First Time by Karen Bouris 1993
The Fossil Trail by Ian Tattersall 1995
From Lucy to Language by Donald Johanson and Blake Edgar 1996
Roll of Thunder, Hear My Cry by Mildred D. Taylor (fiction, written for young people) 1976
The Monkey's Paw: New Chronicles from Peru by Robin Kirk 1997
Burma: The Next Killing Fields by Alan Clements 1992
The Flight: Confessions of an Argentine Dirty Warrior by Horacio Verbitsky 1996
The Comfort Women by George Hicks 1994
Little Sister by Kara Dalkey (fiction, written for young people) 1996
Rebels of the Heavenly Kingdom by Katherine Paterson (fiction, written for young people) 1983
Terry by George McGovern 1996
The Structure of Scientific Revolutions by Thomas S. Kuhn 1970
Embracing The Fire by Julia A. Boyd 1997
Meetings with Remarkable Trees by Thomas Pakenham 1997
Women and Human Rights by Katarina Tomasevski 1993
Betrayal Trauma: The Logic of Forgetting Childhood Abuse by Jennifer J. Freyd 1996
Round Up The Usual Suspects by Aljean Harmetz 1992
Sing Down The Moon by Scott O'Dell (fiction, written for young people) 1970
Refugee Women by Susan Forbes Martin 1991
Where Angels Glide at Dawn by Lori M. Carlson and Cynthia L. Ventura (editors) (fiction, written for young people) 1990
John Bowlby and Attachment Theory by Jeremy Holmes 1993
Becoming Human: Evolution and Human Uniqueness by Ian Tattersall 1998
The First Humans by Goran Burenhult (ed.) 1993
The Selfish Gene by Richard Dawkins (fiction) 1989
Following is yet another re-listing,
On Killing: The Psychological Cost Of Learning To Kill In War And Society by Lt. Col. Dave Grossman 1995
Bonobo: The Forgotten Ape by Frans De Wall 1997
The Nazi Doctors by Robert Jay Lifton 1986
Green Backlash: Global Subversion of the Environmental Movement by Andrew Rowell 1996
Survivors: An Oral History of the Armenian Genocide by Donald E. Miller and Lorna Touryan Miller 1993
From Lucy to Language by Donald Johanson and Blake Edgar 1996
The Structure of Scientific Revolutions by Thomas S. Kuhn 1970
The First Time by Karen Bouris 1993
Terry by George McGovern 1996
Women and Human Rights by Katarina Tomasevski 1993
The Comfort Women by George Hicks 1994
The Monkey's Paw: New Chronicles from Peru by Robin Kirk 1997
The Dragon in the Cliff by Sheila Cole (fiction, written for young people) 1991
(February 10th, 1999)
At any rate, I have read about two dozen political journals and about a dozen books (I think) in the past few months, but I'm having massive trouble attempting to organize anything - the citations, my mind, the papers I'm attempting to write, or anything else. But at any rate, I will attempt to break back into updating this file with just one book to start with; one of the three I am in the middle of reading right now. Hopefully (with a capital H), hopefully, I will be able to fill in the rest of the materials . . . So anyway, here goes:
The Observer as an Educational Model
It Takes Three To Make A System
The Alleged 'Machine' Metaphor
All-At-Once-System-Advancement
down up
The way I found this book was, well, I haven't been able to afford to buy any books in a long long time, months it seems, and I've been so discouraged, that I've even stopped writing down the names of books that I've seen, that I desperately need to read (I've run across about fifteen, I think, in the last two months - but alas, have gotten, or read, none of them). Anyway, I gotta holt of about 15 dollars, wowie zowie, somehow or other, and raced over to Green Apple Books on Clement Street, and tore up to the science section. But looking over their collection, all those titles, all a jumble, I just couldn't tell - somehow my mind just wasn't on it. If I'd had about a hundred dollars, I would known the four or five to buy in this section (before moving on to the psychiatry and Latin America sections), and then, later, the three or four to read, but just one book? Just ONE?!!?? Impossible.
Anyway, a store clerk happened by, ever-shelving, as they do, and naturally I asked her if she could recommend a couple. She said she really didn't know anything about science, literature - fiction - was her area (ho hum), but I pressed her for something, anything. She said she'd get another clerk who knew about science, but she seemed pretty very nice, so, as is my way in such circumstances, I pleaded, 'pleeeeeeeease, oh pleease, you, you, you must have heard something . . .' I guess I must have seemed a little desperate. She kind of looked at me funny, like maybe I was a bit too strange (I couldn't tell exactly), and she kind of shrugged her shoulders and took this book off the shelf and handed it to me, then quickly disappeared around the stacks. Sort of the "Ouiji board" method of bookfinding - straight from the hands of the gods . . .
I glanced through the book. Hmmm . . . '. . . Physics . . . Harmony . . . Purpose . . .' . . . hmmm . . . maybe . . .
Before I left the store, I looked around for the clerk who'd shown it to me, but I couldn't remember what she looked like (sigh, I mean, it all happened so fast . . .). So I went up to the last gal I saw before leaving, and asked her if she was the one who'd recommended it. She said no, it wasn't her, and I asked her if she would thank whoever it was for me, and she smiled at me, and, with stars in her eyes (what is it about bookstores, anyway), she promised to do so. I then made my way out to the street, found a little cafe (it was the Richmond district, a really nice, Asian neighborhood which has some cafe tables on the sidewalk), and sat down to read. As it tuned out with this book . . . Yes!
down up
Now, about a quarter way through the book, I am finding it to be frustrating, informative, and encouraging, all at once (a little like the process of finding it). Basically, it looks like a pretty good book, laying out the whole systems idea in biology/evolution in contrast to the old "cause-and-reaction" model. It was written in 1987, three years after I wrote volume one of the 'Paradigm', and about the same time that Dawkins was putting out 'The Selfish Gene'.
As I've mentioned elsewhere in this bibliography, and of course, throughout this web-site, I understand the entire, inaccurate "one-against-the-other/nature-is-hostile" "framework" regarding the nature of life to be gasping its last on this planet, finally, and the accurate "matrifocal/cooperative/work-out-well-all-around" understanding to be rapidly replacing it as the scientific understanding of how this bioecosystem actually works.
This book is in fact a set of demonstrations and arguments from physics, chemistry, ethology, and a host of other sciences, laying out the case for, voila, the systems/cooperative understanding. In other words, excellent background material for 'Paradigm from California', and welcomingly, much of it new to me.
March 3, 1999
down up
I'm now about three quarters of the way through it, and looking back on it a little . . .
The first chapter is entitled "Physics as the Paradigm", which is sort of interesting to me, as physics is one of the fields I know almost nothing at all about.
I mean, I have heard about the idea of "reductionism", which is, apparently, the matter of attempting to exactly overlay every logical level of life - atoms, chemicals, proteins, plant life, primates, etc. - on top of every other logical level, without making any distinctions at all regarding the changes in logic, from one logical level to the next. That always seemed to me to be the "flat-as-a-board" school of thought, so common in sociobiology, behaviorism, and formal nazi pseudo-science from the thirties and forties.
down up
And I certainly have heard of "materialism", which, although I don't know anything about it, I just kind of presume to mean the understanding that ALL things that we need to know to solve the great problems of harm to humans, can be scientifically quantified, which is something I am sure is quite true.
down up
I mean, I never read Marx, or any of the other nineteenth century philosophers, but I have heard of the term "dialectical materialism" and have been sort of going around with the idea in my head that it must mean, well, the "dialectical" part, meaning that things advance in logical levels, and the "materialism" part meaning, that the truth is singular and constant, at all logical levels, and that everything we need to know about, can be accurately quantified, again, at all logical levels.
So, since I know that that's true - logical levels type advancement ('dialectics'), and quantifiable, constant truth at all logical levels ('materialism') - then, since I know that that's all true, then, if that's what Marx meant by "dialectical materialism", then he must have been pretty smart.
I mean, Betrand Russell didn't figure out logical levels in math until about twenty years after Marx had died, so if Marx anticipated it via studying history and economics, well, if that's true, that's pretty good . . .
down up
But there's something else in this physics chapter that I found sort of interesting. The author mentions that the big change from pre-twentieth-century physics to twentieth-century physics, the change brought about by Einstein's discovery of relativity (whatever that is), is the discovery that in order to measure anything, there must be a third party present, in addition to the thing being measured, and the measuring scale - there has to be "an observer", a third party, so to speak. I'd never thought of it that way - kind of fascinating. Anyway, I think, I'm not sure, but I think, the author of this book (The New Biology) is saying something like that.
down up
Now the idea of the necessity for a "third party" is well known to me from the world of politics, law, mathematics, psychiatry, education, and personal interaction. I mean after all, in law for example, for criminal cases, they don't call it "the (alleged) perpetrator vs. the victim".
They call it "the (alleged) perpetrator vs. the people", or "vs. the state". I mean, you can't exactly have them (the perp and the victim) "settle it among themselves". Can you imagine? Obviously, the most viscous and violent and destructive would automatically win the day, approximately one hundred percent of the time. In that sort of case, obviously, you need a third party, the people, or the society as a whole, to step in. And even more, apparently it is understood that it is not just the individual who is aggrieved, but the people as a whole, who are the victimized party. I think that's the way they figure it, best I can tell . . .
down up
But this "third party observer" stuff came up when I was teaching high school too. I mean, how many times have I heard, through the sixties (indeed, even from Mao himself), and ever since, "if you want to understand something, you have to experience it". "The people that know, are the people who have been through it". It's Gospel, and it's insane. Ridiculous. Truly crazy.
I emphasized, over and over in my classes, if you want to know something, you observe it, from a backed off position. The people that go through it learn the least about it. The observer can learn a lot from the people that go through it, sure, that's major, of course, but the people in the heat, they're too caught up in it to understand what's going on.
The people that observe it, intelligently, comprehensively, they're in the best position to know. You want to know about heroin or cocaine? About car crashes? About rape? About beatings? And especially, about revolution? The people who go through it know the least about it. That's because the experience itself, changes you so much, especially if there's some major trauma involved, you don't even remember your original reference point in the first place.
Boy oh boy oh boy . . . did I ever take heat for that one!!! . . . hooooonneey!!!
But it's true. If you want to learn about something, you have to look at it from a lot of different angles, from a distance, where you have some room, some time, some space, some protection, from outside the rim of the action.
I mean, sure, if you do recover, over time, and you see it from a lot lot lot of new angles, and you get some protection, you might learn a lot about the situation you were in. But that depends on serious recovery, and serious protection, but then again, then you yourself become the observer. But in a lot of cases, too too too many, that kind of overall recovery, never really happens.
If you want to learn, observe, from outside. That's number one. That's a major, major point, about Education.
down up
I must mention a major qualification for the above, there's big loopholes in the above paragraphs; I know that. Sometimes, some people can step 'in and out' of a situation, either in their mind, or in conversation with others; it's actually rare, but it can be done, some people, sometimes, under some circumstances.
So, there's a lot of loopholes to be filled and tied together in the above paragraphs, true enough; I haven't articulated it as well as it needs to be . . . but still. There's something Big, about this matter of "the observer"; "the third party"; the "outsider" . . . In education, in law, in politics, in science, in history, in social interaction, in journalism, in war, in psychiatry, and, now apparently, as a matter of physics as well. Something or other, anyway. Oh well. What-ever . . .
down up
I remember too, when we were first figuring out about logical types and logical levels, what I first flashed on was 'the low level' (the individual elements in a system) and 'the high level' (the system itself), but it wasn't enough; there was something missing - it was too "flat", too 'conflicted', too confusing, too mixed up. We searched and pondered, and indeed, we finally discovered the third logical type (Eureka!) . . . combed everything out . . .
And also, even among the low level elements of a system, we found that there are never just two elements to a system - there always must be a third, or everything crashes. It takes at least three, to make a system - seems to be a major law of nature, or Law of God, if you prefer that metaphor. (I wonder why Moses didn't include it . . . I guess he couldn't think of everything . . . no guideposts to math in that bible . . . a major omission methinks . . .)
Anyway, I don't really know nothin' about physics, but that first chapter, "Physics as the Paradigm", and the stuff about Einstein's discovery of "the observer" in relativity theory, did sort of get my mind going a little . . .
down up
Then there was the second chapter, which is called "Life". This I'm a little more familiar with. I mean, after all, I understand the harm-to-humans problems (which is my only real focus), to go down only so far as, approximately, protons, electrons, and like that; and only about as far out as this solar system, say the orbit of Pluto.
I mean, I know there's more stuff going on down below the size of a proton, and more stuff going on outside this solar system, but I understand that those limits - 'from protons to Pluto' (so to speak) - constitute the 'limits' of this bioecosystem, well, at least all we need to really know. in order to solve the great harm-to-humans problem, and get everything working well for everyone, which again, is all I really care about.
I mean once all these horrific problems are all solved, six billion, or ten billion, or however many, people doing well, finally, well, then new things will come up - who knows what - and then it'll all get bigger still. Of course. Ok. But that's AFTER these great harm-to-humans problems are solved. Ok?
But, right now, from about electrons and 'waves' (whatever they are), to the edge of this solar system, that's all of, or, it seems to me, most of anyway, what we Need to know right now. That's the way it looks to me, anyway. I mean, maybe I'm just 'a hick' or something, but that's the way I think of the term: "This Bioecosystem", or more briefly put: life. To me, that's what matters. Six billion persons wide (and necessarily of course, their (our) plant, animal, land, sea, and air environment), all in health and satisfaction. That's it for now. That's the way I see it.
down up
So anyway, this second chapter, 'life', gets up to the level of proteins, cells, and teeny tiny little organisms. This started to get interesting. For one thing I always found the comparison between "machines", and life-based organisms to be rather absurd, but the best I could do was to mention the profound difference between the number of logical levels in a machine, no matter how sophisticated its computer program was, and the number of logical levels in an organism - the difference isn't just "of a higher order", but rather, many many times higher orders. I mean, I do think that life, including humans, can be fully understood, but the logic involved bears no relation to any definition of the word machine.
But the authors here get substantially more specific than I've gotten on the matter. They mention the self-replicating quality, the self-repair quality, the resiliency, the astounding transformation of nutrients, the essential indivisibility of the organism as a whole, the presence of the entire plan for the whole organism in every single chromosome, and a host of other features that make the infamous 'machine' (alleged) analogy obviously preposterous. Again, it is certainly true that we can understand all we need to understand to solve all the great problems we face, in medicine, in psychiatry, in communications, in neurology, in law, and everywhere else - but obviously not if we attempt to understand such things on the oh so flat machine model.
Anyway, in this section, it started to sort of occur to me that these authors are delivering such excellent, background details for "Paradigm from California" that it started seeming almost a little spooky. I kept looking at the copyright date, 1987, 1987, hmmmm . . . that's just three years after we wrote Volume One, and the year we mailed Volume Two. Wonder what that means . . .
down up
There was one thing about this chapter that I wasn't sure quite jived for me . . . They keep talking about the "autonomy" of each cell, in itself, and each organism. I mean, not in contrast to their interdependence, but in addition to it. But the word "autonomy" got mentioned just a couple too many times, as if they were being a little defensive about being thought of as too, well, leftist, or something. But I don't know . . . maybe it was a way of making sure that there is a of, sort of "decision", a component of what I would call "out of the blue", a component of "fresh air" so to speak, running throughout even the most stable, billion year homeostasises of nature . . . guess I'll reserve judgment on that word "autonomy" as they use it, for the moment . . .
down up
A little later on in the book, in the chapters called "cooperation", and "harmony", well, what can I say? This is solid, "Paradigm from California" backup. They're so casual about it, it makes me think that there must be a whole literature of biology of this nature available that I am unaware of . . . you learn something every day. I mean the biological component of the "Paradigm from California" is only about two or three elements out of thirty in the overall paradigm, but these folks have got it down in a very specific, detailed way, and, it seems to me, to an irrefutable degree.
down up
It makes me wonder, if this was in published material such as this book more than ten years ago, why oh why oh why is all that "survival of the strong/dominating/aggressive", and "the competitive", the "one against the other", "nature is hostile" stuff still being taught, and promoted, as gospel (gasp!) no less, in schools, professions, and the media everywhere. I mean, I could see it being taught as the old, archaic, idea, sort of the way that they teach about the dark ages, as history, as quaint (and satanic) pseudo-science, but teaching that "nature-and-human-nature-as-hostile-competitive" stuff as Gospel!, as the only game in town! It's just so weird . . .
In classrooms and the mass media generally, there seems to be this claim that there's a battle between "creationism" being taught, and this (pseudo-science) "hostile nature" idea being taught. So you can take your pick - either the non-science "creationist" view, or, the psuedo-science "hostile nature" view. As if the "hostile/competitive" nature stuff is the enlightened (!!!) view.
But it's neither enlightened, nor science. Neither one. And the actual science view, that the "cooperative/integrative/helpful/even-feminine" dynamic is actually what "survival of the fit" actually means, is practically unknown among students and the general public as the high level science view. It's really astounding.
Like so much else in American life, people are presented with two harmful, inaccurate alternatives, as the only game in town (so to speak). And the accurate and helpful formulation, is held entirely out of view.
down up
Anyway, I'm now about three quarters through the book, on the chapter called "Origins". Lotsa stuff about Darwin. I never really did read Darwin, although I have read an awful lot about him. Somehow, I always presumed, from everything else I'd read, that his idea of natural selection was that those organisms that adapted best in consort with the world around, survived. I was under the general impression that he was pretty skeptical of the whole idea that there was some kind of "hostile", "killer", competition between species, or between members of a species. But according to these authors, they say that the competition idea was indeed Darwin's, which does surprise me. Oh well, he did, I suppose, predate Russell, Einstein, and all the twentieth century systems scientists, but from what I'd read in Bowlby's biography, I got the strong impression that he did have some clues about it. We'll see . . .
down up
Then there's a passage in this chapter that's again, almost spooky . . . the author is talking about the findings of Gould and others that evolution - that is, advances from one species to the next - doesn't come about slowly, incrementally, gradually, but rather, a species itself is relatively stable, with small changes here and there, and then, suddenly, again, Suddenly, a new species emerges from it, all at once. Relatively "overnight" so to speak.
They put it in the following way:
Back in the summer of 1986, I was formulating material for "Paradigm Volume II", Chapter 16, 'Continuation/Prologue', and I'd read about large portions of chromosomes that were apparently "mute", and, I'd read, that apparently served no function. I just couldn't believe that they served no function; that didn't fit at all with what I'd understood about biology and evolution. Then it occurred to me (as an artist) that in fact maybe they kind of a "graphics tablet" as I remember putting it, mutations "permutating" in a variety of ways, to emerge as a whole new system, all at once, in progeny organisms. I remember sitting on the floor of Stacey's bookstore in Palo Alto, and the medical bookstore down the street for a whole day, trying to find some clue if my guess was right, but I couldn't find any reference. I eventually decided that if it was true, some biologist must have thought of it before me, in some obscure biology journal that I'd run across some day, and just wrote it up in the following way:
. . . there is some evidence that vast numbers of changed genes may well be carried forward for many, many generations without affecting the characteristics of the organism that contains them. It is known that the majority - possibly as much as 90% - of gene-like portions of every DNA strand are 'mute', that is, do not engender the production of cells and have a function that has not yet been definitively identified, at least not that we know of at this time. It seems possible to us that most mutations may collect, coalesce, and combine in these apparently 'muted' portions of the strands, to appear as a small part of a combination of new characteristics in some creature ten, twenty, forty generations ahead. We do not know if the truth of this matter of apparently 'muted' genes is already known to scientists and mathematicians at this time, although if it is not known, it seems likely that it will be known shortly.
Anyway, a formal biologist did write it up at around the same time, and his book was published the same year we sent copies of this paradigm chapter (ch. 16, 'Continuation/Prologue') to about 250 scientific journals, academics, and professionals, which was 1987. But I still don't know if this particular idea was published earlier, or if it has been either confirmed, or discredited since . . . oh well . . .
down up
But that really doesn't matter one way or the other - it's only one of the 'low level' points in the overall, fifteen hundred point "Paradigm from California", not one of the thirty 'high level' elements. Still and all, the overall point being made, by both these authors and myself, has in fact been confirmed and is now an accepted part of established evolutionary biology, namely, that the term "slow evolution" is a contradiction in terms. While it's true that many low level changes do accumulate sort of 'silently', and 'mutely' over a long period of time, when the change of species comes, it comes all at once, and then the new species remains reasonably stable for a long time after that. There is no "slow", "imperceptible", gradual, undefined blending from one species into the next. That's a big, new understanding in science. I think a theorist named Jay Gould is one of the primary discoverers regarding this matter, and I do remember that Ian Tattersall spent considerable time explaining the implications for human evolution, in "The Fossil Trail" I think it was. (One of these day, I'm going to have to read something by this Gould person.)
Although it is my view that Darwin got it right in the most major way, regarding "natural selection", apparently, from what I am coming to understand, Darwin did also talk about "gradual evolution" - 'imperceptible blending from one species to the next' - and it seems to me that it's now confirmed that he was mistaken about that detail.
down up
What I find so fascinating about this "sudden-change-regarding-system" idea in evolution is that it conforms so very well to what has been discovered regarding high level patterns closer to home. Marat, Marx, Lenin, and Mao (especially Lenin), from what I understand, also concluded that that is the way revolutionary history works - sudden, all-at-once change from an earlier system to a more advanced system I think is what they said is the way of history.
While I think they (especially Lenin and Mao) made some serious - and even almost fatal - errors regarding the primary mechanisms of that change (guns/attachment-judgment/coercion rather than logical-levels/cognition-judgment/cooperation), still and all, the idea of "all-at-once-advancement-in-human-well-being-type-change" still holds as the rule.
down up
I'm guessing (just a guess) that this is what happened about 12,000 years ago too - 3,000 generations of Homo Sapiens Sapiens food gathering societies, and then, suddenly, in just a couple of generations, presto!, farming societies, just like that, including irrigation, surplus, and all the rest. Suddenly, the dreamtime, overnight. Just a guess.
down up
(For some reason I feel compelled to note also that when something goes wrong, things can get really bad. Lenin's most helpful revolution turning into Stalin's purges, plus the German reaction [WWII] in Russia, all became quite a nightmare, as it turned out, turning worse still in the 1990's. When the change comes, it's got to come properly methinks, "elements/connection/system", taking all into account . . . somehow . . .
down up
Anyway, I think this all-at-once-change dynamic was also the idea in mathematics when Russell and Whitehead noticed the absolute change and difference in "logical type" ('type of logic') from one logical level to the next, more advanced logical level. Fascinating too that this was Kuhn's idea regarding scientific advancement throughout western civilization. "Scientific Revolution", all-at-once, and not gradual morphis.
In my opinion, it was also illustrated in Lorenz's understandings regarding the development of psychological (and psychiatric) mechanisms in birds, and in Piaget's and Bowlby's discoveries regarding children (although the analogy there may not hold quite so well, just that advancement mechanisms, and 'sensitive periods' come about relatively abruptly). Anyway, ain't it a kick? that 'hard' sciences (evolution theory and paleontology) has finally caught up with the 'social' (revolution, history, psychiatry) sciences? That don't happen too often, and, well, the social scientist part of me does find it just a little bit satisfying.
down up
I have to say, that the idea behind how "Paradigm from California" projects the major change in society at this time to take place, and my experience with attempting to publish it, does reflect this basic principle of "overnight" change. Admittedly, it's a long jump from evolutionary advancement to American Politics, but, well, a butterfly's wings can only expand so far via 'selection' within its species, - must advance to another species altogether. This co-optation stuff, in politics, definitely has its limits. One can only co-opt so much, within the old way of understanding . . . and then a more advanced understanding altogether has to come on line, in order to keep going . . .
My opinion is that they had this paradigm, in the 19oh's, but, nipped in the bud with W.W.I, building again in the thirties, and clipped again with WWII and the cold war; almost almost again in the '60s, then co-opted in the 70's and pounded down in the 80's, and, here we are again, March 12th, 1999, that very same paradigm, pristinely complete and ready, and those behind the Republicans and the media so crazily determined to thwart it, again . . . it's just not right . . .
down up
Mr. Clinton is perhaps the only person on the planet who coordinates things, and can coordinate things so fully properly, for them, and for everyone, and they so desperately lock him up tight as a drum . . . it's just so . . . so . . . so . . . wrong . . . they are so wrong . . . it's beyond nice words to say how totally totally wrong they are, to do that to him . . . I think I'd better say it in his language, though - they are so wrong - rather than in mine, they are so bleepedy bleep, so explicative deleted bleep, bleepedly bleep beep beep . . . I'm so ready, but I'm so frozen, all alone here . . . can't . . . force field . . . help . . . can't . . . move . . . heeeelp . . .
down up
Well, anyway, I'm going to mention a couple of other things about this book, "The New Biology". For one thing, I must mention that while the authors take issue with some of the smaller parts of Darwin's ideas, like "gradual, imperceptible change", which I think they are right about, they also take issue with the whole matter of "natural selection" altogether, which I find rather shocking. I mean, I've decided to consider their point; I'm certainly not one to dismiss a new whole framework out of hand, if the presenters are properly science-minded, which they are, but I do think they are wrong here. "Natural selection" is still reasonable, and is the only reasonable explanation for how one possible new line, new species, comes to do well in the environment, and another does not.
down up
I had to think about this one a little bit. I mean, ok. So. Instead of one mutation at a time coming on line in a progeny organism, and being selected in or out depending on how well that new trait helps strengthen its environment, which I could see doesn't quite add up, that one-tiny-new-trait-at-a-time doesn't add up, 'gradual change' doesn't add up, so instead of that, in 'mute' portions of the chromosomes, many genes, mutated genes plus duplicate copies of already present genes, permutate into a new configuration, and that whole new configuration comes on line. Or something like that.
But, unless I'm misunderstanding (which is entirely possible), it seems like if you have fifty or a hundred genes permutating in that 'mute' 'graphics tablet' portion of the chromosome, well, I mean, you couldn't have each of a zillion permutations tried out in progeny organisms - it would seem like there are too many permutations for that to be possible.
So. That might mean that there is some sort of selection mechanism made, while still in mutesville . . . But how could that be? I mean, how could the chromosome know which of the zillion possible permutations to direct into action as a new species? It seems to me that there's a problem here. I mean, maybe they've already figured it out, and I just don't know about it. Probably so, actually. But if they haven't, I'm sure they will. Maybe even I will, although not right now; I have other things on my mind.
But anyway, I'm sure there's a perfectly reasonable scientific explanation. Someone'll figure it out.
down up
But what's so astounding in this book, is, that when these authors come to this 'gap' in explanation, they simply declare 'God did it'. (!!!) I mean, I was pretty shocked to read that "explanation".
I mean, I'm sure god did do it, but he did everything, so that doesn't explain anything. This is a book of science, and good science at that. So when you come to something you can't explain, or don't understand, you make a speculation, call it a speculation, try to figure it out, and ask readers to figure it out. That's the way science works. What is this 'God did it' stuff? I find it very very weird. Kind of made me blink . . . waaa??? . . .
So I had to ask myself, 'am I really reading science here'? and I looked the book over and decided, definitely yes, this is indeed science. In fact, about 95% of the books that I read, I have some serious disagreements with the authors; indeed, sometimes I disagree so so very much with authors that I also like so very much and get so much great stuff from - I won't name them here but it's all fields . . . so I guess I'm not really thrown . . . it's just that I'm not used to a scientist explaining a gap in his thinking by explaining to the reader that it was the mind of God that did it . . .
down up
So where's this 'God did it' stuff coming from? I have to make a few guesses. For one thing, I haven't quite finished the book yet, but he seems to think the whole system has some sort of purpose. Now, I think that too, no problem there, but I explain it scientifically, fully self-evident to anyone's five-senses, cognitive, rational, mathematical, perfectly scientific mind. Maybe the authors think that if you notice high level purpose, you just have to get all ethereal, but I've found that that's just not the case. God is a perfectly understandable, scientifically verifiable system, laws and all. No need to get all spooky . . .
I think they have trouble separating out low level purpose, and high level purpose anyway - different logical types, a perfectly mathematical concept, but they don't seem to realize that.
But there's another problem that I'm gonna guess that they have; and that's purely political. I don't know this of course - just a very wild guess. And I'm guessing that it's a bit related to all that autonomy stuff earlier in the book. Maybe, because they are so clearly proving that cooperation and harmony is the way of nature (rather than competitive and hostile being the way of nature), then, they're afraid of being called mechanistic, atheistic communists. Maybe it's a defensive move. God forbid anyone should call them communists (the Soviet Union was still alive, barely, when the book was published), so they repeat "autonomy" (read 'independence') ninety million times, and throw in a little God to fill a scientific gap. Ok ok. I can handle that. Basically. More or less. I mean, I can judge things on their scientific merits, and I judge this book to be very very good, despite what I see as a lapse or two here and there. Just like every other book I like, use, and admire.
Then also, maybe their publisher, "Shambhalla" (sounds sort of spiritual, don't it?) sort of liked it better with a little credit to God somewhere along the line. I mean, I couldn't get published that year, but they did manage it, so maybe they know how to get along better than me. I can handle that too. I mean maybe, obviously I really don't know, just complete guessing. I mean, even the name "The New Biolog
35 best books, with annotations.
1997 annotation cluster
Classroom texts, 1978 to 1983.
Best books read, 1987 to 1994.
Best books read, 1995 to 1996.
Best books read, 1997.
The 35 best books I ever read, with annotations.
The 100 best books I ever read, by category.
Related Pages
Bibliographical Notes, 1994
3 books. This short essay reviews three books and was originally written in 1993 for a small family newsletter.
This bibliography, consisting of about 250 items, gives some idea of the particular sort of materials read in the eighteen months prior to the writing of the formal, 200,000 word, two volume "Paradigm From California", that is, the sort of materials read from early 1983 to late 1984. As mentioned elsewhere, for the previous thirty years, I'd read almost exclusively political journals and books of history and sociological analysis. Quite suddenly, in early 1983, I opened a workbook assigned by a teacher at some classes I was attending, and read the words of Virginia Satir: "Family therapists deal with family pain." I was 'thunderstruck', to say the least, and therein was begun the last frantic stages of this paradigm project. "The stretch", so to speak.Sections Available From Research (circa 1983)
Virginia Satir. From Conjoint Family Therapy, Chapter
1, pages 1 - 7.
Don D. Jackson, MD. From Family Process, 4 : 1
- 20, 1965
Also In The Interactional View, ed. by Watzlawick, pages
3 - 21.
Don D. Jackson MD. From Archives of General Psychiatry,
12 : 589 - 594, 1965
Also In The Interactional View, pages 21 - 31.
Frederick B. Ford, MD and Joan Herrick, MSS.
From American Journal of Orthopsychiatry, 44 (1) January
1974.
Antonio J. Ferreira MD. From Psychiatric Research Reports,
20, 1966 American Psychiatric Association.
Also In The Interactional View, pages 48 - 55.
Virginia Satir. From Conjoint Family Therapy, Chapter
V, pages 16 - 45.
Virginia Satir. From Conjoint Family Therapy, Chapter
VI, pages 45 - 54.
Jay Haley. From The Interactional View, pages 31
- 48.
Also in Reflections on Therapy, by Haley, pages 94 - 112.
Paul Watzlawick. From Pragmatics of Human Communication,
pages 43 - 47.
Salvador Minuchin. From Families and Family Therapy,
pages 16 - 45.
Gregory Bateson, Don D. Jackson, Jay Haley, and John
Weakland. From Behavioral Science, Vol. 1, No. 4,
October, 1956.
Also In Double Bind, ed. by Sluzki and Ransom, and In Beyond
the Double Bind, ed. by Berger.
Paul Watzlawick. From Pragmatics of Human Communication,
Chapter 3, pages 73 - 117.
Virginia Satir. From Conjoint Family Therapy, Part
Two, pages 63 - 90.
Virginia Satir. From Techniques of Family Therapy,
by Haley and Hoffman, Chapter 2, pages 97 - 173.
Carl Whitaker. From Techniques of Family Therapy, Chapter
4, pages 265 - 360.
Jay Haley. From Leaving Home, 95 pages of excerpts,
including the whole set of 'Annabelle' Interviews.
Richard Fisch, MD. From Archives of General Psychiatry,
13 : 359 - 366, 1965.
Also In The Interactional View, pages 266 - 273.
Paul Watzlawick. From Pragmatics of Human Communication,
Chapter 6, pages 187 - 231
Don D. Jackson, MD. From Medical Opinion And Review,
Vol. 3, No. 5, pages 28 - 33, 1967.
Also In The Interactional View, pages 154 - 163,
Carlos E. Sluzki, MD, and Eliseo Veron, Ph.D. From
Family Process, 10 : 397 - 410, 1971.
Also In The Interactional View, pages 226 - 240.
David Berenson, MD. From Family Therapy : Theory
And Practice, Edited By P. Guerin.
Ronald Liebman, MD, Salvador Minuchin, MD, Lester Baker, MD,
and Bernice L. Rosman, Ph.D. From Family Therapy
:Theory And Practice.
Murray Bowen, MD. From Georgetown Family Symposia,
Vol. 1, 1971 - 1972, Georgetown University Medical Center.
Also In Family Therapy In Clinical Practice, By Murray
Bowen, Chapter 22, pages 529 - 547
Murray Bowen, MD. From Family Therapy In Clinical Practice,
Chapter 15, pages 320 - 335.
Also in Family Therapy :Theory and Practice, edited by
Philip Guerin, pages 335 - 348.
Paul Watzlawick. From Swiss Review of World Affairs,
Vol. 22, No. 12, March 1973, pages 19 - 22.
Also in The Interactional View, pages 299 - 308.
Also In Change, Chapter. 5, pages 47 - 61.
Salvador Minuchin and H. Charles Fishman. From
Family Therapy Techniques, pages 1 - 10.
Kristin Linklater. From Freeing The Natural Voice,
pages 6 - 16.
Aubrey Metcalf, MD. From Hysterical Personality,
Edited By Mardi J. Horowitz, MD, Chapter 4, pages 223 - 281
Jay Haley. From Family Process.
James L. Framo, Ph.D. From Family Process, 1976,
Vol. 15, pages 193 - 210. Also In Explorations In Marital
And Family Therapy, By James Framo, Chapter 8, pages 171 -
190.
Werner M. Mendel. From Schizophrenia, Chapter 5,
pages 43 - 48.
Jay Haley. From Uncommon Therapy, Chapter 2, pages
41 - 64,
D. H. Heard, British Journal of Medical Psychology,
1978, 51, pages 57 - 76.
Raymond M. Bergner, Family Process, 1977, 16 : 1,
pages 85 - 95.
David V. Keith, MD, Family Process, 1980, 19 : 3,
pages 269 - 275.
M. Duncan Stanton, Ph.D., Family Process, 1977,
16 : 2, pages 191 - 197.
Laurence R. Barnhill, Ph.D., & Dianne Longo, RN,
MS,, Family Process, 1978, 17 : 4, pages 469 - 478.
Richard B. Gartner, Ph.D., Richard H. Fulmer, Ph.D., Margot
Weinshel, RN, & Shelly Goldklank, MS, Family
Process, 1978, 17 : 1, pages 47 - 58.
Luciano L'Abate, Ph.D., & M. Lyn Thaxton, M.Ln.,
Family Process, 1980, 19 : 4, pages 337 - 339.
Carol C. Nadelson, MD, Derek C. Polonsky, MD, & Mary
Alice Mathews, MD, The Journal of Clinical Psychiatry,
1979, 40 : pages 292 - 298.
Martin G. Blinder, MD, Psychiatry, August, 1966,
29 : 3, pages 227 - 235.
Mark Karpel, MS, Family Process, 1976, Volume 15
: pages 65 - 82.
Luciano L'Abate And Bess L. L'Abate, Family Therapy,
1979, Vol. 6 : 3, pages 175 - 184.
Lillian C. Scheiner, Ed.D. & Andrew P. Musetto,
Ph.D., Family Therapy, 1979, Vol. 6 : 3, pages 195
- 203.
Joann M. Lambert, MA., MFCC., Family Therapy, 1979,
Vol. 6 : 2, pages 65 - 69.
Sophie Freud Lowenstein, Family Process, 1981, Vol.
20 : 1, pages 2 - .
Kate Berman, Family Process, 1981, Vol. 20 : 4,
page 449 - .
Steven Bank & Michael Kahn, Family Process,
1981, Vol. 20 : 1, pages 85 - .
John P. Conger Ph.D., Family Therapy, 1979, Vol.
6 : 1, pages 1 - 3
Shirley Gehrke Luthman, Family Therapy, 1978, Vol.
5 : 3, pages 205 - 225.
Bruce Ebert, Family Therapy, 1978, Vol. 5 : 3, pages
227 - 232.
Betty A Walker, Ph.D., Ester Somerfeld, MD., & Rick
Robinson, Family Therapy, 1978, Vol. 5 : 3, pages 259
- 265.
Michael Beck, Ph.D., Family Therapy, 1977, Vol.
4 : 2, pages 163 - 170.
Rosemarie Sampson, Ph.D., Family Therapy, 1977,
Vol. 4 : 2, pages 163 - 170.
Joseph P. Adelson, Ph.D. & William C. Talmadge,
M.Ed., Family Therapy, 1976, Vol. 3 : 2, pages 93 -
95.
Michael J. Beck, Ph.D. , Family Therapy, 1977, Vol.
4 : 1, pages 43 - 48
Israel Eli Sturm, Ph.S., Family Therapy, 1974, Vol.
1 : 3, pages 277 - 284.
Ralph B. Allison, Family Therapy, 1974, Vol. 1 :
1, pages 83 - 88.
Cecile Fenyes, Ph.D., Family Therapy, 1976, Vol.
3 : 2, pages 129 - 132.
Cecile Fenyes, Ph.D., Family Therapy, 1976, Vol.
3 : 2, pages 123 - 128
Jeffrey l. Bogdan, MSW., Family Process, 1982, Vol.
21 : 4, pages 443 - 452.
Lyn Thaxton, M.Ln. & Luciano L'Abate, Ph.D.,
Family Process, 1982, Vol. 21 : 3, pages 359 - 362.
Dena B. Targ, The Family Coordinator, July, 1979,
Vol. 28, pages 377 - 383.
Seymour l. Halleck. MD, Archives of General Psychiatry,
June, 1967, 16 : 6, pages 750 - 757.
Patricia Tracy Rose, Family Therapy, 1977, Vol.
4 : 2, pages 143 - 150.
John Byng-Hall, MRC.Psych., Family Process, 1980,
19 : 4, pages 355 - 365.
Sharon Beckman-Brindley, MA., & Joseph B. Tavormina,
Ph.D., Family Process, December 1978, 17 : 4, pages
423 - 436.
Shirley Braverman, MSW., Family Process, 1981, 20
: 4, pages 431 - 437.
Jerry Bergman, Ph.D., Family Therapy, 1982, Vol.
9 : 3, pages 263 - 269.
Peter A Martin, MD., American Journal of Psychiatry,
December 1971, 128 : 6, pages 745 - 748 (101 - 104).
Augustus Y. Napier, Ph.D., Family Process, December
1971, Vol. 10 : 4, pages 373 - 395.
Joseph Barnett, MD., Contemporary Psychoanalysis,
Spring 1966, Vol. 2 : 2, pages 122 - 134.
Jeir A Doane, Ph.D., James E Jones, Ph.D., Lawrence
Fisher, Ph.D., Barry Ritzier, Ph.D., Margaret T. Singer, Ph.D.,
Lyman C. Wynne, MD., Ph.D., Family Process, June 1982,
Vol. 21 : 2, pages 211 - 223.
Joseph Barnett, MD., Contemporary Psychoanalysis,
Fall 1969, Vol. 6 : 1, pages 48 - 57.
Rachel T. Hare-Mustin, Ph.D., Family Process, December
1982, Vol., 21 : 4, pages 477 - 481.
Joseph Barnett, MD., Family Process, 1971, Vol.
10., pages 75 - 83.
Reuben Panor, MSW., Annette Baran, MSW. and Aurthor
D. Sorosky, MD. From Family Process, Vol. 17, September,
1978, pages 329 - 337.
Family Process, 1981, Vol. 20 : 3, page 295.
Michael Geddes, MA., MSW., and Joan Medway, M.Ed., MSW.
Family Process, Vol. 16 : 2, 1977, pages 219 - 228.
Robert G. Ziegler, MD., and Peter J. Musliner,
MD. Family Process, Vol. 16 : 3, 1977, pages 293 -
305.
Marc Cramer. From The British Journal of Medical Psychology,
1980, Vol. 53, pages 67 - 73.
Svenn Torgersen. From Archives of General Psychiatry,
November, 1980, Vol. 37, pages 1272 - 1277.
Serena-Lynn Brown, Ph.D., Gary E. Schwartz, Ph.D., and
Donald R. Sweeney, MD., Ph.D. From Psychosomatic Medicine,
November, 1978, Vol. 40 : 7, pages 536 - 548.
Nemiah and Nicholi. From The Harvard Guide To Modern
Psychiatry, Harvard University Press, Cambridge, 1978, pages
36 - 37 and 174 - 191.
John F. Clarkin, Ph.D., Allen Frances, MD., and James
L. Moodie, MD. From Family Process, 1979, Vol. 18
: 4, pages 391 - 403.
Arthur M. Bodin, Ph.D. and Laura J. Bodin. From
Family Process, 1977, Vol. 16 : 1, page 117.
Bennett I. Tittler, Ph.D., Steven Friedman, Ph.D. and
Elizabeth J. Klopper, BA. From Family Process, 1977,
Vol. 16 : 1, pages 119 - 121.
Larry B. Feldman, MD. From Family Process, March,
1979, Vol. 18 : 1, pages 69 - 78.
Henry Grunebaum, MD. and Richard Chasin, MD. From
Family Process, Vol. 17, December 1978, pages 449 - 455.
Luciano L'Abate, Ph.D. and Gerald Weeks. From Family
Process, Vol. 19, March 1978, pages 95 - 98.
Carter Jefferson, Ph.D. Family Process, Vol. 17,
March, 1978, pages 69 - 76.
Albert E. Scheflen MD. Family Process, Vol. 17,
March, 1978, pages 59 - 68.
Senta Troemel-Ploetz, Ph.D. Family Process, Vol.
16, No. 3, 1977, pages 339 - 352.
John R. Marshall, MD., and John Neill, MD. Family
Process, Vol. 16 : 3, 1977, pages 273 - 280.
Lloyd I. Sederer, MD., and Nooy Sederer. Family
Process, Vol. 18 : 3, September, 1979, pages 315 - 321.
William R Taylor, MD. From Family Process, 1979,
18 : 4, pages 479 - 488.
James M Harper, MS., A. Lynn Scoresby, Ph.D. and W.
Duane Boyce, MS. From Family Process, 1077, 16 : 2,
pages 199 - 209.
Salman Akhtar, MD. and Ira Brenner, MD.
From The Journal of Clinical Psychiatry, September, 1979,
Vol. 40 : 9, pages 25/381 - 32/385.
Serena-Lynn Brown, Ph.D. From The Journal of Nervous
and Mental Disease, 1981, Vol. 169 : 1, pages 3 - 17.
Mario Rendon, MD. From The International Journal of
Social Psychiatry, Winter, 1977, Vol. 23 : 4, pages 240 -
243.
Robert Langs, MD. From International Journal of Psychoanalytic
Psychotherapy, 1980 - 1981, Vol. 8, pages 3 - 34.
J. Alexis Burland, MD. From International Journal
of Psychoanalytic Psychotherapy, 81-82, Vol. 8, pages. 35-43.
Gordon Baumbacher, MD. and Fariborz Amini, MD.
From International Journal of Psychoanalytic Psychotherapy,
81-82, Vol. 8, pages 501-548.
Ernest R. Hilgard. From Annals of The New York Academy
of Sciences, 1977, Volume 296, pages 48-59.
Serena-Lynn Brown, Ph.D. From International Journal
of Psychiatry In Medicine, 1981-82, 11:1, pages 69-81.
Jules Riskin, MD. and Marguerite E McCorkle,
Ph.D. From Family Process, 1979, 18:2, pages 161-162.
Guillermo Bernal, Ph.D., and Jeffrey Baker, Ph.D.
From Family Process, 1979, 18:3, pages 293-302.
Pauline G. Boss. From Family Relations, October
1980, Vol. 29, pages 445-450.
David Reiss, MD., Ronald Costell, MD., Helen Berkman and
Carole Jones. From Family Process, September 1980,
Vol. 19, pages 239-256.
David Reiss and Mary Ellen Oliveri. From Family
Relations, October 1980, Vol. 29:4, pages 431-444.
Christopher C. Tolsdorf, Ph.D. From Family Process,
Richard A. Oberfield, MD. From Journal of The American
Academy of Child Psychiatry, 1981, Vol. 20, pages 822-833.
Murray Bowen, MD. From Family Therapy In Clinical Practice,
1978, Jason Aronson, New York, pages 461-528.
A. H. Chapman, MD. and Miriam C.M.S. Chapman,
MD. From Brunner/Mazel, New York, 1980.
Neil R. Miller
Neil R. Miller In association with The Term 8 - Term 9
Research Project. Lesa Broncato, Deanna Pinkston, Angela Abeyta, and Christopher Salemme - Directors.
Rabbi Edwin H. Friedman From Family Process
Alec Roy. From British Journal of Medical Psychology,
1981, Vol. 54, pages 131-132.
Barbara Tescher, BSN., MS. From Family Process.
The Family's Construction of Reality, by David
Reiss, 1981, Reviewed by David Kantor, Ph.D.
Also Men At Midlife by Michael P. Farrell
and Stanley D. Rosenberg, Reviewed by Theodore
Lidz, MD.
Also Paradoxical Psycho-therapy: Theory And Practice With
Individuals, Couples, And Families, by Gerald R. Weeks
and Luciano L'Abate, 1982, Reviewed by Steve De Shazer.
From Family Process, Dec. 1982, pages 483-490.
Richard B. Gartner, Ph.D., Richard A. Fulmur, Ph.D., Margot
Weinshel, RN., Shelly Goldlank, Ms. From Family Process,
March, 1978, Vol. 17, pages 47-58.
Bruno Bettelheim. From Alfred A. Knopf, Inc.,
New York, 1983. Pages I - xii and 3-112.
Louis Breger. From Prentice-Hall, Inc., Englewood
Cliffs, New Jersey, 1974. Pages vii-ix and 295-361.
Salvador Minuchin, Bernice L. Rosman, and Lester Baker.
From Harvard College, 1978. Pages
From American Journal of Psychiatry, Vol. 139:11, November,
1982. Pages 1520-1521.
Jay Haley. From Double Bind, ed. by Sluzki
and Ransom, Grune and Stratton, Inc., San Francisco, 1976.
Pages 59-110.
David Reiss, MD. From Family Process, Vol.
10:1, March, 1971. Pages 1-28.
David Reiss. From Family Process, 1971, Vol. 10.
Pages 29-35.
From Family Process, Vol. 21, December 1982. Pages 505-509.
The Family Life Cycle: A Framework for Family Therapy,
Edited by Elizabeth A. Carter and Monica McGoldrick,
reviewed by Lucy Rau Ferguson. Also Gregory Bateson:
The Legacy of a Scientist, by David Lipsit, 1981,
review by Howard M. Feinstei, MD. From Family Process,
Vol. 21, June 1982. Pages 251-256.
D. F. Fleming. From The Cold War and Its Origins,
Volume One, Part One. Doubleday and Company, Inc.,
Garden City, New York, 1961. Pages 3-265.
D. F. Fleming. From The Cold War and Its Origins,
Volume One, Part Two. Doubleday and Company, Inc.,
Garden City New York, 1961. Pages 265-521.
A. H. Chapman. From Harry Stack Sullivan His Life
and His Work. Putnam Press, Toronto, 1976. Pages
17-69.
John Bowlby. From The Making and Breaking of Affectional
Bonds. Tavistock London, 1979. Pages 1-24.
John Bowlby. From The Making and Breaking of Affectional
Bonds. Tavistock London, 1979. Pages 25-43.
John Bowlby. From The Making and Breaking of Affectional
Bonds. Tavistock London, 1979. Pages 44-66.
John Bowlby. From The Making and Breaking of Affectional
Bonds. Tavistock London, 1979. Pages 67-80.
John Bowlby. From The Making and Breaking of Affectional
Bonds. Tavistock London, 1979. Pages 81-102.
John Bowlby. From The Making and Breaking of Affectional
Bonds. Tavistock London, 1979. Pages 103-125.
John Bowlby. From The Making and Breaking of Affectional
Bonds. Tavistock London, 1979. Pages 126-160.
John Bowlby. From Loss, Volume Three, Attachment
and Loss. Basic Books New York, 1980. Pages 46-52
Paul Watzlawick. Basic Books New York, 1978.
S. Minuchin, B.C. Rosman, C. Baker. From Psychosomatic
Families - Anorexia Nervosa in Context. Harvard Press
London, 1978. Pages 139-204.
A High School Research Paper.
D. F. Fleming. From The Cold War and Its Origins.
Double Day and Company, Inc. Garden City, New York, 1961.
Pages 143-145.
Excerpts From Edited Transcripts. fs.
The Program Planning Committee (PPC) and The Research Class.
Jack Belden. From China Shakes The World.
Published by Monthly Review Press, New York, 1970. Pages
275-308.
John Bowlby. From Loss. Volume Three Attachment
and Loss. Basic Books New York, 1980. Pages 338-345.
Minuchin, Fishman. From Family Therapy Techniques.
Harvard Press New York, 1981. Pages 132-138.
F. Lundberg. From The Rich and The Super Rich.
Bantam New York, 1969. Pages 327-388.
Stuart Ewen. From Captains of Consciousness.
McGraw-Hill New York, 1976. Pages 51-61.
Lewis Thomas. From The Medusa and
The Snail. Bantam New York, 1974. Pages 1-6
Lewis Thomas. From The Medusa and The Snail.
New York, 1974. Pages 71-75
Lewis Thomas. From Lives of a Cell.
Bantam New York, 1974. Pages 11-17.
S. Bowles, H. Gintis. From Schooling in Capitalist
America. Basic Books New York, 1976. Pages
68-81.
R. O. Boyer, H. M. Morais. From Labor's Untold Story.
U. E. Press New York, 1955. Pages 65-70.
Changing Role of S.E. Asian Women. From South
East Asia Chronicle and Pacific Research; A
Joint Issue, Jan-Feb., 1979. Issue No. 66.
S. Minuchin, H. C. Fishman. From Family Therapy
Techniques, Harvard Press London, 1982. Pages
11-27.
S. Minuchin, H. C. Fishman. From Family Therapy
Techniques, Harvard Press London, 1982. Pages
28-49.
S. Minuchin, H. C. Fishman. From Family Therapy
Techniques, Harvard Press London, 1982. Pages
50-63.
S. Minuchin, H. C. Fishman. From Family Therapy
Techniques, Harvard Press London, 1982. Pages
64-72.
S. Minuchin, H. C. Fishman. From Family Therapy
Techniques, Harvard Press London, 1982. Pages
73-77.
S. Minuchin, H. C. Fishman. From Family Therapy
Techniques, Harvard Press London, 1982. Pages
78-97.
L. Thomas, from The Medusa and The
Snail Bantam New York, 1974. Title Pages.
John Bowlby. From Attachment, Separation, and Loss.
Tavistock London, 1969, 1973, 1980. Title Pages.
John Bowlby. From The Making and Breaking of Affectional
Bonds. Tavistock London, 1979. Title Pages
and References.
Reviews From The American Journal of Psychiatry, July 1971
(?), June 1974, November 1980.
Fred L. Strodtbeck - Michael S. Olmsted. From The American
Sociological Review. Dec. 1954, Vol. 19, Number 6. Page
651 and Pages 741-759.
Letter to Ted Moore From Neil R. Miller, Reply From
Ted Moore, and Letter to Dr. Robert Alioto. October
to November, 1983.
New Flexibility Urged to Fill Teachers Posts. Gene
I. Maeroff Sept. 27, 1983. Etzioni Wants to Shift Focus
to The Students. Edward B. Fiske, Nov. 1, 1983. Schools
Urged to Encourage Fine Teaching. James Lemoyne,
Nov. 6, 1983. From The New York Times.
A. H. Chapman. Harry Stack Sullivan: His Life and
His Work. Putnam Press, New York 1976. Title
Pages.
McAteer High School Classroom Materials - 1977 to 1983
Classroom Texts - Background/Research (lecture materials - 1977 - 1983)
down up titles guide
Harry Stack Sullivan, MD (via A. H. Chapman, MD)
Salvador Minuchin, MD
Paul Watslawick
Jay Haley
Maria Palazzoli, MD
Murry Bowen, MD
Virginia Satir
John Bowlby, MD
Attachment And Loss ·°·°··°·°·
·°·°·
Volume One: Attachment.
Basic Books, Inc., New York, 1969. 358 pages.
Basic Books, Inc., New York, 1973. 371 pages.
Basic Books, Inc., New York, 1978. 442 Pages.
Tavistock Publications., London, 1979. 160 Pages.
Harry Stack Sullivan
The Interpersonal Theory of Psychiatry.
W.W. Norton & Company, New York, 1953. 384 Pages,
$5.00.
W.W. Norton & Company, New York, 1954. 230 Pages $4.00.
W.W. Norton & Company, New York, 1956. 378 Pages $8.00.
A. H. Chapman, MD
Harry Stack Sullivan's Concepts of Personality Development
and Psychiatric Illness. ·°·°·
With Miriam C. M. S. Chapman. Brunner/Mazel, New
York, 1980. 189 Pages, $23.00.
Brunner/Mazel, New York, 1978. 227 Pages, $17.00
G.P. Putnam's Sons, New York, 1976.
Salvador Minuchin, MD
Psychosomatic Families: Anorexia Nervosa in Context. ·°·°·
With Bernice L. Rosman and Lester Baker. Harvard
University Press, Cambridge, Massachusetts, 1978. 331
Pages, $18.00.
Harvard University Press, Cambridge, Massachusetts, 1974.
256 Pages, $12.50.
With H. Charles Fishman. Harvard University Press,
Cambridge Massachusetts, 1981. 290 Pages, $15.00.
With Braulio Montalvo, Bernard G. Guerney, Jr., Bernice L.
Rosman, and Florence Schumer. Basic Books, New York,
1967. 379 Pages, $15.00.
Paul Watslawick
Pragmatics of Human Communication: A Study of Interactional Patterns, Pathologies, and Paradoxes. ·°·°·
With Janet Helmick Beavin, and Don D. Jackson. W.W.
Norton & Company, New York, 1967, 271 Pages, $21.00.
With John H. Weakland. W.W. Norton & Company, New York, 1977. 396 Pages, $21.00.
With John H. Weakland and Richard Fisch. W.W. Norton
& Company, New York, 1974. 160 Pages, $19.00.
Basic Books, New York, 1978. 160 Pages, $13.00.
Random House, New York, 1976. 243 Pages, $5.00.
Jay Haley
Leaving Home: The Therapy of Disturbed Young People. ·°·°·
McGraw Hill, New York, 1980. 274 Pages, $23.00
The Family Therapy Institute, Washington, D.C., 1981.
254 Pages, $23.00.
W.W. Norton & Company, New York, 1973. 313 Pages,
$5.00.
Mara Selvini Palazzoli, MD.
Paradox And Counterparadox. ·°·°·
With Luigi Boscolo, MD., Gianfranco Cecchin, MD., And Giuliana
Prata, MD., Translated by Elisabeth V. Burt.
Jason
Aronson, New York, 1978. 171 Pages, $22.00
Murray Bowen, MD
Family Therapy in Clinical Practice.
Jason Aronson, New, 1978. 547 Pages, $30.00.
Virginia Satir
Conjoint Family Therapy. A Guide To Theory And Technique.
·°·°·
Science And Behavior Books, Inc., Palo Alto, California,
1967. 189 Pages, $6.00
down up titles guideCloe Madanes
Strategic Family Therapy. ·°·°·
Jossey-Bass Publishers, San Francisco, 1981, 227 Pages,
$18.00.
Emanuel Peterfreund, MD
Information, Systems, And Psychoanalysis
In collaboration with Jacob T. Schwartz.
International Universities Press, Inc., New York, 1971. 380 Pages.
Carlos E. Sluzki, MD And Donald C. Ransom, Ph.D.
Double Bind: The Foundation of The Communicational Approach
To The Family. ·°·°·
Grune & Stratton, New York, 1976. 332 Pages, $40.00
Milton M. Berger, MD
Beyond The Double Bind. Communication And Family Systems,
Theories, And Techniques With Schizophrenics.
Brunner/Mazel, New York, 1978. 246 Pages, $18.00.
Mardi J. Horowitz, MD
Hysterical Personality. ·°·°·
Jason Aronson, New York, 1977. 399 Pages, $25.00
Werner M. Mendel
Schizophrenia: The Experience And Its Treatment.
·°·°·
Josey-Bass, San Francisco, 1976. 139 Pages, #13.00.
Thomas S. Szasz, MD
The Myth of Mental Illness.
Harper & Row, New York, 1974.
Harper & Row, New York, 1970. 292 Pages.
Penguin Books, New York, 1980. 167 Pages, $4.00.
Louis Breger
From Instinct To Identity. The Development of Personality.
·°·°·
Prentice-Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, 1974.
352 Pages, $21.00
Theodore Millon
Theories of Personality And Psychopathology.
Holt, Rinehart, And Winston, New York, 1983. 452 Pages,
$14.00.
down up titles guideAvodah K. Offit, MD.
Night Thoughts. Reflections of A Sex Therapist.
Congdon & Lattes, New York, 1981. 245 Pages, $8.00.
Daniel B. Wile.
Couples Therapy.
John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1981. 212 Pages $30.00
Don D. Jackson, MD
Communication, Family, And Marriage.
Science And Behavior Books, Palo Alto, 1968, 289 Pages
$8.00.
Science And Behavior Books, Palo Alto, 1968. 276 Pages.
$8.00.
Erik H Erikson, MD
Childhood And Society.
W.W. Norton & Company, New York, 1963. 424 Pages,
$4.00.
W.W. Norton & Company, New York, 1968. 320 Pages,
$6.00.
Bruno Bettleheim, MD
Freud And Man's Soul. ·°·°·
Alfred A. Knopf, New York, 1983. 112 Pages, $12.00
Avon Books, New York, 1960. 292 Pages, $.00
Sigmund Freud.
The Ego And The Id.
W.W. Norton & Company, New York, 1923. 56 Pages, $3.50.
Anna Freud
The Ego And The Mechanisms of Defense.
International Universities Press, New York, 1946.
James F. Masterson, MD
From Borderline Adolescent To Functioning Adult: The Test of
Time
With Jacinta Lu Costello, MSW., ACSW. Brunner/Mazel,
New York, 1980. 283 Pages, $21.00.
Carl G. Jung
Man And His Symbols.
Doubleday & Company, New York, 1964. 310 Pages, $12.00
Michel Foucault
Madness & Civilization. A History of Insanity In The Age
of Reason.
Random House, New York, 1965. 289 Pages, $5.00.
Bonanza Books, New York, 1961. 167 Pages, $6.00.
Wilhelm Reich, MD
The Function of The Orgasm
Simon And Schuster, New York, 1973 (1942). 393 pages,
$13.00.
Karen Horney, MD
Self-Analysis
W.W. Norton & Company, New York, 1942. 276 Pages,
$4.00.
R.D. Laing, MD
The Politics of The Family.
Random House, New York, 1969. 124 Pages, #3.00.
Gregory Bateson
Steps to An Ecology of Mind.
Ballantine Books, New York, 1972. 505 Pages, $3.00.
Bantam Books, New York, 1979. 237 Pages, $3.50.
James L. Framo
Explorations In Marital And Family Therapy.
Springer Publishing Company, New York, 1982. 292 Pages,
$24.00.
Neal E. Miller
Selected Papers On Learning, Motivation And Their Physiological
Mechanisms.
Two Volumes. Aldine-Atherton, Chicago, 1971
Ann Faraday
The Dream Game.
Harper & Row, New York, 1974. 366 Pages, $4.00.
down up titles guideAlbert Einstein
Relativity.
Crown, New York, 1961. 114 pages.
Lynn Hoffman
Foundations of Family Therapy. A Conceptual Framework
For Systems Change.
Basic Books, New York, 1981. 349 Pages, $22.00.
Froma Walsh
Normal Family Processes.
The Guilford Press, New York, 1982. 465 Pages, $25.00.
Jean Piaget
The Construction of Reality In The Child.
Basic Books, New York, 1954.
Selected Program Texts (1983)
These next are the texts, about forty I think, that were the immediate basis and inspiration for about half the original, 5,000 hours of McAteer lectures. Those lectures, the written curicullum that developed from them, and student answers to mid-term and final examinations, formed the basis for what later became "Paradigm from California".
down up titles guide
Classroom Texts - 1977 to 1983
D. F. Fleming
The Cold War And Its Origins, 1917-1960 ·°·°·
Volume One: Enemies And Allies, 1917-1945; The Cold War In Europe, 1945-1950 ·°·°·
Doubleday & Company, 1961, Pages 1 - 540.
Doubleday & Company, 1961, Pages 540 - 1115.
Kenneth Neill Cameron
Humanity And Society - A World History ·°·°·
Monthly Review Press, New York, 1973. 436 Pages.
Samuel Bowles, And Herbert Gintis
Schooling In Capitalist America
·°·°·
Basic Books, New York, 1976.
Larry Gonick
The Cartoon Guide To The Universe, Volumes One, Two And Three.
·°·°·
Rip off Press, 1975. X Pages, $2 Ea.
Frederick Engels
The Origin of The Family, Private Property, And The State
International Publishers, New York, 1972 (1877). @$.75.
down up titles guide
Ferdinand Lundberg
The Rich And The Super-Rich: A Study In The Power of Money
Today. ·°·°·
Bantam Books, New York, 1968, 934 Pages.
Nora Levin
The Holocaust: The Destruction of European Jewry, 1933-1945.
·°·°·
Schocken Books, New York, 1973 (1968). 713 Pages, $9.00.
William L. Shirer
The Rise And Fall of The Third Reich ·°·°·
Publisher, Year
Alfred W. McCoy
The Politics of Heroin in Southeast Asia ·°·°·
With Cathleen B. Read And Leonard P. Adams II
Harper & Row, New York, 1972. 354 Pages. $8.00.
Rita Thalmann And Emmanuel Feinermann
Crystal Night ·°·°·
Holocaust Library, New York, 1972. 172 Pages. $5.00
Herbert I. Schiller
The Mind Managers
Beacon Press, Boston, 1973. 191 Pages, $5.00.
Pierre Aycoberry
The Nazi Question
Translated from the French by Robert Hurley
Pantheon Books, New York, 1981. 229 Pages. $7.00.
down up titles guide
Barbara Ehrenreich
Witches, Midwives, And Nurses ·°·°·
Complaints & Disorders ·°·°·
Feminist Press at The City University of New York New York,
1973.
Alex Haley
The Autobiography of Malcom X ·°·°·
Publisher, Year.
Annette Fuenter and Barbara Ehrenreich
Women In The Global Factory. ·°·°·
South End Press, Boston, 1983. 59 Pages.
Arthur Upham Pope
Maxim Litvinoff
L.B. Fischer, New York, 1943. 498 Pages
down up titles guide
Henri Cartier-Bresson
The World of Henri Cartier Bresson
·°·°·
Publisher, Year
Farm Security Administration Photographers
In this Proud Land·°·°·
Ed. By Stryker and Wood Publisher, Year
Louis Hine
America and Lewis Hine ·°·°·
Publisher, Year
down up titles guide
Jack Belden
China Shakes The World ·°·°·
Pathfinder, Monthly Review, 1949.
David Milton And Nancy Dall Milton
The Wind Will Not Subside - Years In Revolutionary China -
1964-1969 ·°·°·
Random House, New York, 1976. 379 Pages. $5.00.
Albert Soboul
The French Revolution, 1787-1799: From The Storming of The
Bastille To Napoleon ·°·°·
Translated from the French by Alan Forrest and Colin Jones,
Random House/Vintage, 1975. 613 Pages. $6.00.
down up titles guide
Richard O. Boyer and Herbert M. Morais
Labor's Untold Story ·°·°·
United Electrical, Radio & Machine Workers of America,
New York, 1955. 380 Pages. $5.00
Richard Edwards
Contested Terrain: The Transformation Of The Workplace In The
Twentieth Century. ·°·°·
Basic Books, Inc., New York, 1979. 216 Pages.
Stuart Ewen
Captains of Consciousness: Advertising And The Social Roots
of The Consumer Culture. ·°·°·
McGraw-Hill, New York, 1976. 220 Pages, $5.00
Louis Adamic
Dynamite: The Story of Class Violence In America
·°·°·
Chelsea House Publishers, New York (1931). 480 pages,
$2.50.
down up titles guide
Lewis Thomas
The Lives of A Cell. Notes of A Biology Watcher. ·°·°·
Bantam Books, New York, 1974. 174 Pages, $2.00.
Bantam Books, New York, 1980. 146 Pages, $3.00.
Joshua S. Horn, MD
Away With All Pests: An English Surgeon In People's' China:
1954-1969
Monthly Review Press, New York, 1969. 183 Pages $4.00
David King Dunaway
How Can I Keep From Singing: a biography of Pete Seeger ·°·°·
McGraw-Hill, New York, 1981. 311 Pages, $10.00.
Thomas S. Kuhn
The Structure of Scientific Revolutions. ·°·°·
The University of Chicago Press, Chicago, 1970. 210 Pages,
$1.50.
Kristin Linklater
Freeing The Natural Voice.
Drama Book Specialists (Publishers), New York, 1976. 210
Pages, $12.00
Viola Klein
The Feminine Character
Routledge, New York, 1974.
Supplementary Bibliography - 1986 - 1994
footnote 6
Riane Eisler
The Chalice and the Blade: Our History, Our Future ·°·°·°·
Harper, San Francisco, 1988, 203 pages plus notes
(4/12/97 - see essay "Beyond the Wave" for review)
Marija Gimbutas
The Civilization of The Goddess: The World of Old Europe *
HarperCollins, San Francisco, 1991, 401 pages plus notes
Geoffrey Ashe
Dawn Behind the Dawn *
Henry Holt and Co., Inc., New York, 1992, 225 pages plus
notes
Donald Johanson and Maitland Edey
Lucy: How Our Oldest Human Ancestor Was Discovered ·°·°·°·
Touchstone, Simon and Schuster, New York, 1981, 376 pages
Donald Johanson and James Shreeve
Lucy's Child: The Discovery of a Human Ancestor
Avon, New York, 1989, 290 pages
Delta Willis
The Hominid Gang: Behind the Scenes in the Search for Human
Origins
Penguin Books, New York, 1989, 324 pages
Richard Leakey and Roger Lewin
Origins Reconsidered: In Search of What Makes Us Human *
Anchor, Doubleday, New York, 1992, 360 pages
Roger Lewin
Bones of Contention: Controversies in the Search for Human
Origins *
Touchstone, Simon and Schuster, New York, 1987, 319 pages
Donald Johanson, Lenora Johanson, and Blake Edgar
Ancestors: In Search of Human Origins
Villard Books, Random House, New York, 1994, 328 pages
Goran Burenhult (ed.)
The First Humans: Human Origins and History to 10,000 BC
From the American Museum of Natural History, HarperCollins, New York, 1993, 234 pages
John McCrone
The Ape that Spoke: Language and the Evolution of the Human
Mind *
Avon Books, New York, 1991, 263 pages plus notes
Richard Dawkins
The Selfish Gene *
Oxford University Press, Oxford, U.K., 1976, 266 pages
plus notes
Lewis Thomas
The Youngest Science: Notes of a Science-Watcher *
Bantam, New York, 1983, 248 pages plus notes
John A. Paulos
Innumeracy *
Hill and Wang, Inc., New York, 1989, 224 pages
Lawrence M. Krauss
Fear of Physics
Basic Books, HarperCollins, New York, 1993, 199 pages
John Bowlby
Charles Darwin: A New Life *
W.W. Norton, New York, 1990, 455 pages plus notes
Mardi Jon Horowitz, M.D.
Stress Response Syndromes *
M. Horowitz, U. Cal. Med. Sch. at S.F
Jason Aronson, Inc., Northvale, New Jersey, 1978, 1986,
328 pages
Christopher Simpson
The Splendid Blond Beast: Money, Law, and Genocide in the Twentieth
Century ·°·°·°·
Grove Press, New York, 1993, 287 pages
Martin Gilbert
Auschwitz and the Allies
Holt Rinehart and Winston, New York, 1981, 341 pages
Russell Jack Smith
The Unknown CIA: My Three Decades With The Agency *
R. J. Smith, Former Deputy Director for Intelligence, Central
Intelligence Agency
Peramon-Brassey, McLean, Virginia, 1989, and Berkley
Books, New York, 1992, 259 pages
Christopher Simpson
Blowback: America's Recruitment of Nazis and Its Effects on
the Cold War ·°·°·°·
Weidenfeld and Nicolson, New York, 1988, 290 pages plus
notes
Tom Tomorrow
Tune in Tomorrow ·°·°·°·
St. Martin's Press, New York, 1994, 119 pages
Mark Zepezauer
The CIA's Greatest Hits *
Odonian Press, Tucson, Arizona, 1994, 89 pages
Russ Bellant
Old Nazis, the New Right, and the Republican Party: Domestic
Fascist Networks and Their Effect on U.S. Cold War Politics
A Political Research Associates Book, South End Press, Boston, Massachusetts, 1989, 90 pages
plus notes
Nigel Hamilton
JFK: Reckless Youth ·°·°·°·
Random House, New York, 1992, 804 pages plus notes
Jeremy Holmes
John Bowlby and Attachment Theory
Routledge, New York, 1993, 216 pages
John Bowlby, M.D.
A Secure Base ·°·°·°·
Basic Books, Harper, New York, 1988, 180 pages plus notes
Jeffrey Moussaieff Masson
The Assault on Truth: Freud's Suppression of the Seduction
Theory ·°·°·°·
Farrar, Straus, and Giroux, New York, 1984, 192 pages plus
notes
Louise Armstrong
And They Call It Help: The Psychiatric Policing of America's
Children ·°·°·°·
Addison Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1993, 279 pages
Keith Richards
Tender Mercies: Inside the World of a Child Abuse Investigator
·°·°·°·
The Noble Press, Inc., Chicago, and
The Child Welfare
League of America, Inc., Washington, DC, publishers. 1992,
280 pages
Louise Armstrong
Rocking the Cradle of Sexual Politics ·°·°·°·
Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1994, 275 pages
plus notes
April Daniels and Carol Scott
Paperdolls: A True Story of Childhood Sexual Abuse in Mormon
Neighborhoods *
Recovery Publications Incorporated, San Diego, Ca, 1992,
227 pages
E. Sue Blume
Secret Survivors: Uncovering Incest and Its Aftereffects in
Women *
Ballantine Books, New York, 1990, 299 pages
Sheila Sisk and Charlotte Foster Hoffman
Inside Scars: Incest Recovery as Told by a Survivor and Her
Therapist *
Pandora Press, Madison, Alabama, 1987, 213 pages
Lenore Terr, M.D.
Unchained Memories: True Stories of Traumatic Memories, Lost
and Found
Basic Books, HarperCollins, New York, 1994, 247 pages plus
notes
Peter Lee-Wright
Child Slaves ·°·°·°·
Earthscan Publications, London, 1990, 270 pages
Peter R. Breggin, M.D. and Ginger Ross Breggin
The War Against Children
St. Martin's Press, New York, 1994, 201 pages plus notes
Gilberto Dimenstein
Brazil: War on Children *
Latin American Bureau, London, 1991, 81 pages
Connie Guberman and Margie Wolfe (eds.)
No Safe Place: Violence Against Women and Children
Women's Press, Toronto, Ontario, Canada, 1985, 161 pages
Patricia Politzer
Fear in Chile: Lives Under Pinochet ·°·°·°·
Translated by Diane Wachtell
Pantheon Books, New York, 1989, 245 pages
Marjorie Agosin (ed.)
Surviving Beyond Fear: Women, Children, and Human Rights In
Latin America *
White Pine Press, Fredonia, NY., 1993, 178 pages plus notes
Alicia Partnoy (ed.)
You Can't Drown The Fire: Latin American Women Writing in Exile
*
Twenty-five translators
Cleis Press, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania, 1988, 251 pages
Jacobo Timerman
Prisoner Without A Name, Cell Without A Number *
Vintage, Random House, New York, 1981, 164 pages
Alicia Partnoy
The Little School: Tales of Disappearance and Survival in Argentina
*
Cleis Press, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania, 1986, 136 pages
Margaret Hooks
Guatemalan Women Speak
The Ecumenical Program on Central America and the Caribbean
(EPICA), Washington DC, 1993, 131 pages
Caipora Women's Group
Women In Brazil *
Latin America Bureau, London, 1993, 129 pages
Marjorie Agosin
Women of Smoke
Translated by Janice Molloy
The Red Sea Press, Inc., Trenton, New Jersey, 1989, 109
pages
Nawal el Sa'adawi
Memoirs From The Women's Prison *
Translated from Arabic by Marilyn Booth
The Women's Press, London, 1991, 197 pages
Jill Radford and Diana E.H. Russell, (ed.)
Femicide: The Politics of Woman Killing *
Twane Publishers, New York, 1992, 359 pages
Louise Malette and Marie Chalouh (eds.)
The Montreal Massacre
Translated by Marlene Wildeman
Gynergy Books, Charlottetown, Prince Edward Island, Canada,
1991, 177 pages
Freidoune Sahebjam
The Stoning of Soraya M. *
Translated by Richard Seaver
Arcade Publishing, Inc., New York, 1994, 160 pages
Anne Llewellyn Barstow
Witchcraze: A New History of the European Witch Hunts ·°·°·°·
Pandora, HarperCollins, San Francisco, 1994, 165 pages
Selma R. Williams and Pamela Williams Adelman
Riding the Nightmare: Women and Witchcraft From The Old World
To Colonial Salem *
HarperCollins, New York, 1978, 208 pages
Kate Millett
The Politics of Cruelty *
W.W. Norton & Co., New York, 1994, 314 pages
Darius M. Rejali
Torture and Modernity: Self, Society, and State in Modern Iran
*
Westview Press, Boulder Colorado, 1994, 176 pages plus
notes
Diana E. H. Russell
Against Pornography: The Evidence of Harm *
Russell Publications, Berkeley, 1993, 151 pages
Christopher Simpson
The Science of Coercion *
Oxford University Press, Oxford, U.K., 1994, 117 pages
plus notes
Catharine A. MacKinnon
Only Words *
Harvard University Press, Cambridge, Massachusetts, 1993,
110 pages plus notes
Alice Vachss
Sex Crimes ·°·°·°·
A. Vachss, Queens County, New York Assistant District Attorney
for Special Violence
Random House., New York, 1993. 284 pages
Judith Rowland
Rape: The Ultimate Violation *
J. Rowland, San Diego County, Ca. Assistant District Attorney
for Special Violence
Pluto Press, London, 1986, 353 pages
Linda A. Fairstein
Our War Against Rape *
L. Fairstein, New York County Assistant District Attorney for
Special Violence
William Morrow and Company, Inc., New York, 1993, 276 pages
Susan Estrich *
Real Rape: How the Legal System Victimizes Women Who Say No
Harvard University Press, Cambridge, Mass., 1987, 104 pages
plus notes
Kate Shanahan
Crimes Worse Than Death *
Attic Press, Dublin Ireland, 1992, 138 pages
Peggy Reeves Sanday
Sex, Brotherhood, and Privilege on Campus *
New York University Press, New York, 1990, 195 pages
Alexandra Stiglmayer (ed.)
Mass Rape: The War Against Women In Bosnia-Herzegovina *
Translations by Marion Faber
The University of Nebraska Press, Lincoln Nebraska, 1994,
230 pages
Margaret T. Gordon and Stephanie Riger
The Female Fear: The Social Cost *
University of Illinois Press, Chicago, 1989/91, 139 pages
plus notes
Emilie Buchwald, Pamela R. Fletcher, and Martha Roth (eds.)
Transforming a Rape Culture
Milkweed Editions, Minneapolis, Minnesota, 1993, 449 pages
Emma Goldman
The Traffic In Women
Times Change Press, Ojai, California, 1970, 63 pages
Cecilie Hoigard & Liv Finstad
Backstreets ·°·°·°·
University of Oslo. Translated from Norwegian by Katherine Hanson,
Nancy Sipe, and Barbara Wilson
The Pennsylvania State University Press, University Park,
Pennsylvania, 1992 (Norwegian edition, 1986), 215 pages
Joan J. Johnson
Teen Prostitution *
Franklin Watts, New York, 1992, 170 pages
Lisa Louis
Butterflies Of The Night: Mama-Sans, Geisha, Strippers, and
the Japanese Men They Serve *
Tengu Books, Tokyo, 1992 208 pages
Anne Allison
Nightwork: Sexuality, Pleasure, and Corporate Masculinity in
a Tokyo Hostess Club
The University of Chicago Press, Chicago, 1994, 204 pages
Leslie McRay with Ted Schwarz
Kept Women *
William Morrow and Company, Inc., New York, 1990, 214 pages
Saundra Pollock Sturdevant and Brenda Stoltzfus
Prostitution And The U.S. Military In Asia
The New Press, New York, 1992, 334 pages
Jess Wells
A Herstory of Prostitution in Western Europe
Shameless Hussy Press, Berkeley, Ca., 1992, 91 pages
Sue Gronewold
Beautiful Merchandise: Prostitution in China, 1860-1936 *
Harrington Park Press, Binghampton, NY, 1985, 114 pages
Gilbert Hernandez and Jaime Hernandez
Love and Rockets ·°·°·°·
Graphic Stories, Comics
Fantagraphics Books, Inc., Seattle, Washington, 1983 -
1994
Jan Goodwin
Price of Honor: Muslim Women Lift the Veil of Silence on the
Islamic World
Little, Brown and Company, Boston, Massachusetts, 1994,
358 pages
Peoples Translation Service
Connexions ·°·°·°·
Quarterly translations of non-ficton writing by and about women
from around the world. Often, journalism at its most brilliant.
Peoples Translation Service, Oakland, Ca. 1975-1994, 40
pages per issue.
Yayori Matsui
Women's Asia
Zed Books, London, 1987, 159 pages
Emily Hancock
The Girl Within *
Fawcett Columbine, New York, 1989, 261 pages
Max Sugar, M.D., (ed.)
Female Adolescent Development *
M. Sugar, U. La. Med. Sch. at New Orleans
Brunner/Mazel, New York, 1979, 343 pages
Susanna Kaysen
Girl, Interrupted ·°·°·°·
Turtle Bay Books, Random House, New York, 1993, 168 pages
Fred Lawrence Guiles
Norma Jean: The Life of Marilyn Monroe *
Bantam, New York, 1969, 392 pages
Marilyn Monroe
My Story
Stein and Day, New York, 1974, 239 pages
Joyce Nicholson
What Society Does To Girls *
Virago, London, 1977, 72 pages
Jeffrey L. Geller and Maxine Harris
Women of the Asylum: Voices From Behind The Walls, 1840 - 1945
Anchor, Doubleday, New York, 1994, 328 pages
Arlie Russell Hochschild
The Managed Heart: Commercialization of Human Feeling *
University of California Press, Berkeley, 1983, 198 pages
plus notes
Fulang Lo
Morning Breeze: A True Story of China's Cultural Revolution
*
China Books and Periodicals, San Francisco, 1989, 243 pages
Rebecca E. Klatch
Women of the New Right *
Temple University Press, Philadelphia Pennsylvania, 1987,
216 pages plus notes
Ashley Montagu
Touching: The Human Significance of the Skin *
Harper and Row, New York, 1986, 414 pages plus notes
Todd Gitlin
The Sixties: Years of Hope, Days Of Rage ·°·°·°·
Bantam Books, Toronto, 1987, 440 plus notes
Holly Near with Derk Richardson
Fire in the Rain, Singer in the Storm: An Autobiography of
Holly Near *
William Morrow and Company, New York, 1990, 282 pages
William D. Haywood
Against the Current: Bill Hayward's Book, The Autobiography
of Big Bill Haywood ·°·°·°·
International Publishers, New York, 1983 (1929), 365 pages
Philip S. Foner
History of the Labor Movement in The United States, Vol. 4:
The Industrial Workers of the World *
International Publishers, New York, 1965, 558 pages plus
notes
Anthony Bimba
The Molly Maguires *
International Publishers, New York, 1932, 136 pages
Len De Caux
The Living Spirit of the Wobblies *
International Publishers, New York, 1978, 152 pages
Melvyn Dubofsky
We Shall Be All: A History of the Industrial Workers Of The
World *
Quadrangle, New York Times Book Co., New York, 1969, 484
pages plus notes
Tomiko Higa
The Girl With The White Flag
Bantam Doubleday, Dell, New York, 1991, 127 pages
Dorothy Gilman
Girl in Buckskin ·°·°·°·
Fawcett Juniper, Ballantine, New York, 1956, 1992, 153
pages
Katherine Paterson
Lyddie ·°·°·°·
Puffin Books, Penguin. New York, 1992, 181 pages
Scott O'Dell
Island of the Blue Dolphins ·°·°·°·
Dell Publishing Company, New York, 1960, 184 pages
Dell Publishing Company, New York, 1976, 144 pages
Some Primary Selections
From the Supplementary Bibliography.
Among The Best of The New Books That I Ran Across, Circa 1987 to 1994
First and Foremost:
Then, after that:
Also:
------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------
1995/1996 Bibliography Update
Recommendations from among the most recently discovered works (1995-1996).
I've found these selections to be new, highly relevant to this paradigm, and generally fascinating.
Well, by my lights, herein are about two dozen really excellent books, in approximately this order:
First of all
Seven Classics:
Then:
Also:
And:
Books Read, Fall/Winter 1995:
Virginia Lee Barnes And Janice Boddy, editors
Aman: The Story Of A Somali Girl
Pantheon Books, New York, 1994, 350 pages plus notes. [excellent]
Margaret Thaler Singer and Janja Lalich
Cults in our Midst
Jossey-Bass, San Francisco, 1995
367 pages, notes, bibliography, index.
Peter LaBerge
Exploring The World of Lucid Dreaming
Ballantine, 1990, 313 pages
Evelyn Lau
Fresh Girls and Other Stories
Hyperion, New York, 1995, 110 pages, (fiction)
Janet Malcolm
In the Freud Archives
Flamingo/Fontana, London, 1986 (1984)
Joan Ryan
Little Girls in Pretty Boxes: The Making and Breaking of Elite Gymnasts and Figure Skaters
Doubleday, New York, 1995. 243 pages. [excellent]
Nawal el Sa'adawi
Memoirs From The Women's Prison *
Translated from Arabic by Marilyn Booth
The Women's Press, London, 1991, 197 pages
Jo Fisher
Out of the Shadows: Women, Resistance and Politics in South America
Lat. Am. Bureau , London, 1993
211 pages, Glossery, Bibliography, Index.
Kathleen Barry
The Prostitution of Sexuality
NYU Press, New York, 1995
367 pages, extensive appendix, notes, index
Mahnaz Afkhami
Women In Exile
University of Virginia Press, Charlottesville, 1994, 208 pages. [excellent]
Sandra Gardner
Teenage Suicide
Julian Messer, Engelwood Cliffs, New Jersey, 1985
With Gary Rosenberg, M.D.
111 pages, resources, and bibliography of articles and books.
Claribel Alegria
They Won't Take Me Alive: Salvadorean Women Struggle for National Liberation
Translated by Amanda Hopkinson
The Women's Press, Ltd., London, 1987, 151 pages
Wendy Ewald
Magic Eyes: An Andean Girlhood
From stories told by Alicia and Maria Vasquez;
Photographs by Wendy Ewald and the children of Raquira Columbia.
Bay Press, Seattle, 1992, 180 pages
Books Read, 1996:
Peter R. Breggin and Ginger Ross Breggin
The War Against Children
St. Martin's Press, New York, 1994
201 pages, plus notes, an extensive bibliography and index. [excellent]
Barrie Levy, editor
Dating Violence
The Seal Press, Seattle, Washington, 1991
283 pages, Bibliography, plus, one-paragraph biographies of 33 contributers.
Marcia Mobilia Boumil, J.D., LLM.
Date Rape: The Secret Epidemic
What it is, What it isn't, What it does to you, What you can do about it.
with Joel Friedman, Ph. D. and Barbara Ewert, J.D.
Health Communications, Inc. Deerfield Beach, Florida, 1993
151 pages, Resources and Bibliography
Patricia Easteal
Voices of the Survivors
Spinifex Press, Australia, 1994
208 pages, Bibliography, Appendix
Peggy Reeves Sanday
A Woman Scorned: Acquantaince Rape on Trial
Doubleday, New York, 1996
293 pages, Notes, Bibliography, index
Jyostna Sreenivasan
The Moon Over Crete
Illustrations by Sim Gellman
Holy Cow! Press, Duluth, Minnesota, 1994. 128 pages, (fiction)
Evelyn Lau
Runaway: Diary of a Street Kid
Coach House Press, Toronto, 1995
276 pages.
Ann E. Imbre
Spoken in Darkness: A Small Town Murder and a Friendship Beyond Death
Plume/Penguin, New York, 1994 (originally Hyperion, New York, 1993), 258 pages. [excellent]
Judith Lewis Herman, M.D.
Trauma and Recovery: The Aftermath of Violence - from Domestic Abuse to Political Terrorism
Basic/Harper, New York, 1992
236 pages, Notes, and index. [excellent]
John Bowlby
A Secure Base: Parent-Child Attachment and Healthy Human Development
Basic, New York, 1988
180 pages, References and Index
[this is a short summary of, in my opinion, the greatest book ever written.]
Lenore Terr, M.D.
Unchained Memories: True Stories of Traumatic Memories Lost and Found
Basic, New York, 1994
247 pages, Notes, Index
Omar S. Castaneda
Among The Volcanos
Yearling/Dell/Bantam, New York, 1991
183 pages , (fiction).
Jennifer Harbury
Bridge of Courage: Life Stories of the Guatemalean Companeros and Companeras
Common Courage, Monroe, Maine, 1995, 275 pages. [excellent]
Anne Allison
Nightwork: Sexuality, Pleasure, and Corporate Masculinity in a Tokyo Hostess Club
University of Chicago Press, Chicago, 1994
204 pages, References and Index
Daniel Jonah Goldenhagen
Hitler's Willing Executioners: Ordinary Germans and The Holocaust
Alfred A. Knopf, New York, 1996
461 pages and 138 pages of notes plus index.
Mary Pipher, Ph.D.
Reviving Ophelia: Saving the Selves of Adolescent Girls
Ballantine, New York, 1994
293 Pages, Short Bibliography, and index
Emma Sepulveda, editor
We, Chile: Personal Testimonies of the Chilean Arpilleristas
Translated by Bridget Morgan
Azul Editions, Falls Church, Virginia, 1996
187 Pages, Short Bibliography
Riane Eisler
Sacred Pleasure: Sex, Myth, and the Politics of the Body
HarperSanFrancisco, New York, 1995
401 pages plus Appendix, Notes, Bibliography, Index.
(4/12/97 - see essay "Beyond the Wave" for review)
Beverly Allen
Rape Warfare: The Hidden Genocide in Bosnia-Herzegovina
University of Minnesota Press, Minneapolis, 1996
144 pages, Notes, Appendix, Bibliography, index
John D. Barrow
The Origin of the Universe
Basic/HarperCollins, New York, 1994
137 pages, Brief Notes, and Index
Laurence Leamer
As Time Goes By: The Life of Ingrid Bergman
Harper and Row, New York, 1986
361 pages, plus Filmography, plays and TV Appearaences, Notes and Index.
Thanh-dam Truong
Sex Money, and Morality: Prostitution and Tourism in South East Asia
ZedBooks, Ltd., London, 1990
202 pages, Extensive Bibliography and Index.
Mike A. Males
The Scapegoat Generation: America's War on Adolescents
Common Courage, Monroe, Maine, 1996
293 pages and Notes and Index. [excellent]
Zohl De Ishtar
Daughters of the Pacific
Spinifex, North Melborene, Austrailia, 1994
253 pages and references, bibliography, glossary, resources, index. [excellent]]
Margaret Thaler Singer and Janja Lalich
"Crazy" Therapies
Jossey-Bass, San Francisco, 1996
216 pages, a short bibliography, index
Books Read, January to December, 1997:
January
Carol Andreas
When Women Rebel: The Rise of Popular Feminism in Peru
Lawrence Hill & Company, Westport, Connecticut, 1985
212 pages plus notes and photographs.
John Bowlby
The Making and Breaking of Affectional Bonds
Tavistock Publications London, 1979
160 pages plus references and index. (reread)(reread)
William Blum
Killing Hope: U.S. Military and CIA Interventions Since World War II
Common Courage Press, Monroe, Maine, 1995
383 pages, plus notes, appendices, index [excellent]
Jan Goodwin
Price of Honor: Muslim Women Lift the Veil of Silence on the Islamic World
Little, Brown and Company, Boston, Massachusetts, 1994, 358 pages.
February
Jo Fisher
Mothers of the Disappeared
South End Press, Boston, 1989
159 pages, plus bibliography, index (notes follow chapters). [excellent]
Jeffrey Moussaieff Masson
Against Therapy: Emotional Tyranny and the Myth of Psychological Healing
Atheneum, New York, 1988
254 pages, plus bibliography and index (notes are integrated, page by page - thank you Mr. Masson and publisher, page by page is where they should always be.).
Susan Hemmings, editor
True to Life: Writings by Young Women
Sheba Feminist Publishers, London, 1986
243 pages, plus 24 pages of U.K. resources.
Elisabeth Brooke
Women Healers: Portraits of Herbalists, Physicians, and Midwives
Healing Arts Press, Rochester, Vermont, 1993/1995, 151 pages plus notes, bibliography, index.
David P.H. Jones, M.D.
Interviewing the Sexually Abused Child: Investigation of Suspected Abuse
Gaskell, Royal College of Psychiatrists London, 1992 (Fourth Edition)
56 pages plus appendices and references
March
Constâncio Pinto and Mattew Jardine
East Timor's Unfinished Struggle: Inside the Timorese Resistance, A Testimony
South End Press, Boston, 1997, 250 pages plus notes, bibliography, resources, and index.
Journals and Periodicals
Off Our Backs, January, 1997, 28 pages
Issue Focus: Brighton U.K. Conference on Violence and Women's Citizenship (9 pages of 24).
Covert Action Quarterly (CAQ), Winter, 1996-97, 68 pages;
Also: Women in the '96 election (10 of 24), Discussion forum in DC, Bechdel, World clips, resources.
Issue Focus: Surveillance (27 pages of 68);
Extra, January/February, 1997, 28 pages
Also: CIA/crack selling (13 pages), privatizing welfare (5), Mexico and US trained military (6), Afghanistan (7), shorts, books.
Issue Focus: Media reporting of CIA/Cocaine traffic (6 pages of 28)
NACLA Report on the Americas, January/February 1997, 52 pages;
Also: "Promise Keepers" as "men's movement" hype (2 pages), Labor Party (2), Dole for Sale and the press (3), TWA 800 (3), Tobacco (2), Reuters at Yahoo (1), Environmental Reporting (2).Issue Focus: Mexico (28 pages of 52)
Z Magazine, February 1997, 68 pages;
Also: Peru (2 pgs.), "Democracy" (7), Nicaragua (1), books, shorts, resource listing of 250 Latin American NGOs.
Issue Focus: General (Peru, US in Korea, Global Warming, Holocaust, Labor Party, etc. - 4-5 pages each)
B: Feminist Response To Pop Culture, rainy season, 1996, 32 pages;
Issue Focus: "Special Childhood-Obsessed Issue" (8 pages of 32)
News and Letters, January/February 1997, 12 pages;
Also: Wonderbra Culture (2 pgs.), TV Women (4), Ad Models (2), Shorts, Five Books Reviewed. (3128 16th Street, box 201, San Francisco, Ca. 94103, $3).Issue Focus: General (Serbia, Lumumba, Disney, Black history, Marx, Ebonics, Haiti, about 40 short articles)
In These Times, February 17 to March 2, 1997, 40 pages,
Issue Focus: Women (26 pgs. of 40; 7 articles: Cosmetics, Contraception, Immigrant Women, Parenting, Black Women, Abortion Before Roe, etc.),
(eight Periodicals, 328 pages)
Shorts (6 pgs.), Hollander, letters, books.
Leah Hager Cohen
Glass, Paper, Beans: Revelations on the Nature and Value of Ordinary Things
Doubleday, New York, 1997, 289 pages plus bibliography.
PS. Speaking of 'salting in': . . . All day, I've been thinking of annotation notes to write regarding Jeremy Holmes' "Attachment Theory" and Aljean Harmetz's "The Making of Casablanca", both of which I finished just today - my mind buzzing with Holmes' rendition of the nature of affectional bonding, and spinning with Bogey and Ingrid at the airport . . . but when I sat down to write, it was the above note about Leah's book that came to mind . . . I wonder if there's a connection . . .
Magda Denes
Castles Burning: A Child's Life in War
Norton, New York, 1997, 384 pages.
First some background: when the Nazis invaded Hungary in 1941, they considered it the most safely conservative and anti-Semitic of their occupied territories, and, consequently, they passed over the Hungarian Jews for deportation, figuring there would always be time to come back for them later.
Lewis Thomas
Lives of a Cell: Notes of a Biology Watcher
Viking, New York, 1974, 148 pages plus bibliography. (reread)
Frederick Douglass
Narrative of The Life of Frederick Douglass: An American Slave: Written By Himself
Signet/Penguin, New York, 1968 (1845), 126 pages.
April
Alice Echols
Daring To Be Bad: Radical Feminism in America, 1967-1975
University of Minnesota Press, Minneapolis, 1989
395 pages, notes, appendix, index.
Mikiso Hane (editor and translator)
Reflections on the Way to the Gallows: Rebel Women in Prewar Japan, The Writings of Twelve Leftist Women
University of California Press, Berkeley, 1988, 252 pages plus notes and index.
The introduction includes a fascinating overview of radical leftist history in Japan, and the struggles of women in it - it makes me feel entirely ignorant . . . I had no idea of any of this . . . but the bulk of book is the writings of the women themselves, which are generally personal memoirs written from prison, in some cases just prior to execution . . .
Hillary Carlip
Girl Power: Young Women Speak Out, Personal Writings from Teenage Girls
Warner, New York, 1995, 343 pages plus resources.
Short, almost disassociated one and two paragraph clips, each introduced and narrated by Carlip . . . fascinating . . .
John W. Dower
War Without Mercy: Race and Power in the Pacific War
Pantheon Books, New York, 1986, 317 pages plus notes, bibliography, index.
May
John Bowlby, MD
Attachment (2nd edition)
Basic Books, Inc., New York, 1969, 1982
378 pages plus references and index.
Maria Tocco (managing editor)
Cultural Survival Quarterly (periodical)
Issue Focus: Women And War
Spring, 1995, Volume 19, Issue 1; 20 4-page articles from around the world - Native Americans, Chiapas, UN 'Peacekeepers', Mexico, Rwanda, Refugee Women, Zambia, Ethiopia, Croatia, Northern Ireland, Palestine, Burma, The Karens, Cambodia, The Philippines, The Maya, Guatemala
published by Cultural Survival, Inc. New York, 1995, 84 pages
Isabel Fonsecu
Bury Me Standing: The Gypsies and Their Journey
Vintage/Random House, 1995, 305 pages.
June
Javier Giraldo, S.J.
Colombia: The Genocidal Democracy
Common Courage Press, Monroe, Maine, 1996
119 pages, plus index.
Marcia Clark
Without A Doubt
With Teresa Carpenter, Viking/Penguin New York, 1997
486 plus index. [Excellent]
Journals and Periodicals
Covert Action Quarterly (CAQ), Spring, 1997, 68 pages;
Issue Focus: Latin America (20 pages of 68);
Off Our Backs, May, 1997, 20 pages
Including: Transnationals mining Peru, Tupac Amarus in jungle training, Japan in Peru, US training of Columbian massacre perpetrators. Also: Plutonium from satellites (6 pages), US prison/corporate labor (7 pages), Labor response to unionbusting (7 pages), Corporate employers of universities, (6 pages), US national/international police merger (6 pages), Sudan (9 pages), shorts, books.
Issue Focus: General
Extra, May/June, 1997, 28 pages
Albania, Girl Power, Computers, Cultural Feminism, Domestic Violence, Shorts, Bechdel.
Issue Focus: Television Torture In Schools: Channel One (14 pages of 28)
B: Feminist Response To Pop Culture, Spring, 1997, 36 pages;
Also: "Welfare" "coverage" (5 pages), food industry (2 pages), NY homeless newspaper (2 pages), letters, shorts.Issue Focus: "Sex" (what else is new . . .)
NACLA Report on the Americas, May/June 1997, 52 pages;
Including: "Cosmopolitan" (3 pages), Independent filmmaking (5 pages), Playboy/Details (2 pages), Redbook (3 pages), Paramour magazine (4 pages), On pornography (6 pages), Shorts (4 pages), 8 cd reviews.Issue Focus: Latin American Billionaires (27 pages of 52)
Also: Guatemala (5 pgs.), Ecuador (2), Social Movements (6), books, shorts, letters.
Human Rights Watch Publications Catalog, Spring, 1997, 28 pages
Content: Almost 500 books listed, 50 described in some detail
Claire G. Osborne (Editor)
The Unique Voice Of Hillary Rodham Clinton: A Portrait In Her Own Words
Avon Books New York, 1997, 232 pages
Asia Watch, Women's Rights Project
A Modern Form Of Slavery: Trafficking Of Burmese Women And Girls Into Brothels In Thailand
Human Rights Watch, New York, 1993, 160 pages.
July
Joan Holden (playwright)
Killing Time
The San Francisco Mime Troupe, San Francisco, 1997
Claire M. Renzetti
Violent Betrayal: Partner Abuse in Lesbian Relationships
Sage Publications, Inc., Newbury Park, California, 1992
132 pages, plus notes, detailed appendices, listings of 400 service and support groups for battered lesbians, and index.
Donald Spoto
Notorious: The Life of Ingrid Bergman
HarperCollins Publishers, Inc., New York, 1997
436 Pages, plus Bibliography and Index
August
Carlos E. Sluzki, MD and Donald C. Ransom (editors)
Double Bind: The Foundation Of The Communicational Approach To The Family
Grune & Stratton, New York, 1976
332 pages plus bibliography and index. (reread)
2. You better love us, but if you do, we'll push you away (low level instructions);
3. There's no way out of this one;
4. Better not talk about it or we'll really smack you hard;
5. It just goes on and on and on;
6. All at a formative stage of the child's development."A young man who had fairly well recovered from an acute schizophrenic episode was visited in the hospital by his mother. He was glad to see her and impulsively put his arm around her shoulders, whereupon she stiffened. He withdrew his arm and she asked, "Don't you love me any more?" He then blushed, and she said, "Dear, you must not be so easily embarrassed and afraid of your feelings." The patient was able to stay with her only a few minutes more and following her departure he assaulted an aide and was put in the tubs."
2. Speak the truth; nothing is true;
3. Can't get away from this one;
4. People get nasty when you try to talk about it;
5. It goes on and on; blankets a person's entire adult life.
6. Formative in school; formative on the job; formative in social life, formative everywhere.
Susan Brownmiller
Femininity
Fawcett Columbine, New York, 1984
237 plus sources and index
Michael Parenti
Blackshirts and Reds: Rational Fascism and the Overthrow of Communism
City Lights, San Francisco, 1997
160 Pages plus Index
Marjorie Agosin
Ashes of Revolt: Essays on Human Rights
White Pine Press, Fredonia, NY, 1996, 169 pages.
Andrea Johnston
Girls Speak Out: Finding Your True Self
Scholastic Press, New York, 1997, 201 pages plus bibliography.
September
A. M. Sperber and Eric Lax
Bogart
William Morrow and Co., Inc, New York, 1997
525 pages plus notes, bibliography, plays and filmography, and index
Andrea Dworkin
Life and Death: Unapologetic Writings on the Continuing War Against Women
Simon and Schuster, Inc., New York, 1997
252 pages, plus index
Avi
The True Confessions of Charlotte Doyle
Avon Books, New York, 1990, 221 pages plus appendix
(Fiction, written for young people.)
Paula Fox
The Slave Dancer
Bantam Doubleday Dell, New York, 1997 (1970), 127 pages
(Fiction, written for young people)
Joan Dash
We Shall Not Be Moved: The Women's Factory Strike of 1909
Scholastic, Inc., New York, 1996, 152 pages plus bibliography and index.
(Non-fiction, written for young people.)
Abel Paz
The Spanish Civil War
Editions Hazan, Paris, 1997, 65 pages of text and 132 pages of photographs.
Note: This is not really about The Spanish Civil War per se, but rather a very brief, pamphlet-sized rendition of one fifteen year old boy's recollection of the events of July 17th, 1936 in Barcelona, and the subsequent ten days. July 17th was the day that Franco's legions declared war on the Republican government of Spain, and in immediate response, the people of Barcelona, under the flag of anarchism and communism - the old red and the black - put down the Fascists, and took control of the town by sheer numbers, enthusiasm, and light arms. The author, now approaching eighty years old, gives a classic, first-hand account of those first heady days, and the photographs are extraordinarily expositive.
October
Doug Henwood
Wall Street: How It Works, and for Whom
Verso, New Left Books, New York, 1997
322 pages including notes, plus an extensive bibliography, and index.
Joan Jacobs Brumberg
The Body Project: An Intimate History of American Girls
Random House, New York, 1997, 214 pages plus notes and index.
Lois Lowry
Number The Stars
Dell, New York, 1989, 137 pages
Fiction, written for young people
Eleanor Coerr
Mieko and the Fifth Treasure
Bantam Doubleday Dell, New York, 1993, 77 pages.
Fiction, written for children
Amir D. Aczel
Fermat's Last Theorem: Unlocking the Secret of an Ancient Mathematical Problem
Four Walls Eight Windows, New York, 1996, 137 pages plus notes and index.
I don't know much about math (or a zillion other fields), but I am generally on the lookout for books on that area that maybe I'll understand. After all, I did work out a new math system (see 'Backbone/Schema'), and the whole idea of figuring according to very strict, absolutely-defined, and universal rules, common to all human minds, is, obviously, close to my heart. Anyway, I haven't really found almost any good math books for the uninitiated, as most seem to assume a fascination for that subject "for its own sake", or assume a far deeper understanding of the field than I have. But glancing through this book, "Fermat's Last Theorem", at the UC bookstore, kind of fascinated me as there seemed to be very few equations in the book, and a lot of background discussion in familiar language. Mainly though, I was interested to see how they go about cracking a major puzzle in the math field. I figured there might be generally applicable metaphors for other areas of life.
Katherine Paterson
Bridge to Terabithia
HarperTrophy HarperCollins, New York, 1977
128 pages. Fiction, for young people
Michael Dorris
Morning Girl
Hyperion Paperbacks for Children, New York, 1992
74 pages. Fiction, for young people
Gloria Whelan
Night of the Full Moon
Alfred A. Knopf, New York, 1993
62 pages. Fiction, for young people
November
Jean Craighead George
The Talking Earth
HarperTrophy, New York, 1983
151 pages. Fiction, for young people
Valerie Walkerdine
Daddy's Girl: Young Girls and Popular Culture
Harvard University Press, Cambridge, Massachusetts, 1997
189 pages, plus appendix, bibliography, index
Elizabeth Foreman Lewis
Young Fu of the Upper Yangtze
Bantam Doubleday Dell, New York, 1932 (1990)
255 pages plus notes. Fiction, for young people
Roald Dahl
The BFG
Puffin Books, New York, 1982
208 pages plus notes. Fiction, for children
Jack Nelson-Pallmeyer
School of Assassins: The Case for Closing the School of the Americas, and for Fundamentally Changing U.S. Foreigh Policy
Orbis Books, Maryknoll, New York, 1997
(Orbis Books, P.O. Box 308, Maryknoll, NY 10545-0308)
104 pages plus notes.
Lewis Thomas
The Medusa and the Snail: More Notes of a Biology Watcher
Bantam Books, New York, 1979
146 pages. (reread)
Katherine Paterson
The Great Gilly Hopkins
HarperCollins, New York, 1978
148 pages. Fiction, for young people
Ryan Bishop and Lillian S. Robinson
Night Market: Sexual Cultures and the Thai Economic Miracle
Routledge, New York, 1998
252 pages plus notes, references and index.
I asked the bookseller at Modern Times Bookstore if he had anything new on violence against women, and, after considering the matter for about half an hour, he handed me this. It looks worrisome - a weighty tome, written in the "sociology" (ulp) genre. Oh well, I'm kind of a pushover for next year's news, and it does, maybe, seem to be to the point . . . we'll see . . .
Chris Crutcher
Staying Fat for Sarah Byrnes
Bantam Doubleday Dell/Laurel-Leaf, New York, 1993
216 pages (Fiction, Written for Young People) Excellent
December
Lois Lenski
Indian Captive: The Story of Mary Jemison
Harper/Collins, New York, 1995 (1941). 298 pages, (fiction, based on a true story) plus bibliography of historical sources. (Written for young people.)
Astrid Lindgren
Pipi Lognstockings
Puffin Books/Penguin, New York, 1950 (1997)
160 pages (Fiction, Written for Children)
Translated by Florence Lamborn
Angus Mackenzie
Secrets: The CIA's War at Home
University of California Press, Berkeley, 1997
202 pages plus appendix, notes, and index
Marjorie Agosin
Women of Smoke
The Red Sea Press, Inc., Trenton, New Jersey, 1989
109 pages (reread) Excellent
Translated by Janice Molloy
Michael Parenti
Dirty Truths: Reflections on Politics, Media, Ideology, Conspiracy, Ethnic Life and Class Power
City Lights Books, San Francisco, 1996
282 pages Excellent
Jean Craighead George
Julie Of The Wolves
HarperCollins, New York, 1972
170 pages (Fiction, Written for Young People) Excellent
A wonderful book!
"Picks" from among books read in 1997,
I. First, Seven Powerful Classics:
II. Also, Twelve More Excellent Books:
III. Fiction, Geared For Young People - Fourteen:
(I've been lucky so far, all of these are excellent in one way or another . . . )
IV. Twelve Entirely Helpful Expositions:
V. Catogorized Elsewhere - Five:
VI. Ten Additional Informative Works:
VII. Two Others:
. . . January, 1998
The New Internationalist - March, 1994 - East Timor
Extra - November/December, 1997 - Mass Media Monolith
The Nation - November 24, 1997 - Media Sexual Imagery
Columbia Bulletin - Summer/Fall, 1997 - Violence
Teen Voices - Autumn, 1997 - Race and Stereotyping
Extra - January/February, 1998 - Prisons
The East Timor Estafeta - Autumn, 1997 - The Fires Burn On
Off Our Backs - November, 1997 - Violence Against Russian and US Women
Multinational Monitor - November, 1997 - Multinational Ownership of US Universities
George Hicks
The Comfort Women: Japan's Brutal Regime of Enforced Prostitution in the Second World War
W.W. Norton, New York, 1994
275 pages, Bibliography and Index
Alan Clements
Burma: The Next Killing Fields
Odonian Press, Berkeley, 1992
88 pages plus notes and index
Lori M. Carlson and Cynthia L. Ventura (editors)
Where Angels Glide at Dawn: New Stories from Latin America
HarperTrophy, New York, 1990
104 pages, plus glossary and one sentence notes on each of the eleven authors - Fiction, for young people
Frans De Wall
Bonobo: The Forgotten Ape
Photographs by Frans Lanting
University of California Press, Berkeley, 1997
184 pages, plus notes, bibliography, and index
Includes about 75 large, full-color photographs
Scott O'Dell
Sing Down The Moon
Bantum/Doubleday/Dell, New York, 1970, 137 pages
Fiction, written for young people.
Journals and Periodicals
The New Internationalist, March, 1994 (no. 253), based in Oxford, UK
36 pages of editorial content plus 12 pages of ads, not interspersed.
Issue Focus: East Timor (26 pages of 36).
Also: Chiapas, Nigeria, Bosnia, 3rd World Polio, Ethopia, Guinea-Bissau, letters, shorts (1 page each).
Extra: The Magazine of FAIR, November/December, 1997, 28 pages
Issue Focus: Mass Media Monolith Dominating The World (10 pages of 28)
Also: (2 pages each) Diana, Fast Track, NYTimes on Hong Kong and Colonialism, CIA, Rent Control, 'disappearing' welfare receipients, plus shorts and letters
The Nation, November 24, 1997, 40 pages
Issue Focus (cover): media sexual imagery of youth (4 pages of 40).
Also: Labor Organizing (5 pages), NATO Costs (2), Journalism (2), Nixon Tapes, Working Moms and Nannys, Media, Books, Poetry, Film, Classifieds, letters and shorts.
Colombia Bulletin: A Human Rights Quarterly, Summer/Fall, 1997, 48 pages
Issue Focus: Violence (14 pages of 48).
Teen Voices Vol. 6, Issue 3, No Date; probably Autumn, 1997, 48 pages
Published by Women Express, Inc. PO 120-027, Boston, MA 02112-027, ph. (617) 426-5505
Issue Focus: Race and Stereotyping; Brest Cancer and Loss; Mental 'Illness'; Running Away.
Recommended journal for young people.
Extra: The Magazine of FAIR, January/February, 1998, 28 pages
Issue Focus: Prisons
The East Timor Estafeta: The Voice of the East Timor Action Network/U.S., Autumn, 1998, 12 pages
Issue Focus: The Fires Burn On
Off Our Backs: A Women's News Journal, November, 1997, 24 pages
Issue Focus: Russian and US Women Facing Violent Capitalism
Multinational Monitor November, 1997, 32 pages
Issue Focus: Multinational Ownership and Control of US Universities.
Julia A. Boyd
Embracing The Fire: Sisters Talk About Sex and Relationships
Dutton/Penguin, New York, 1997, 163 pages
. . . February, 1998
Richard Dawkins
The Selfish Gene (2nd Edition)
Oxford, England, 1989
266 pages plus notes, bibliography, and index
and half done, this annotation is completely out of hand;
more like a critique of the "anti-paradigm"
(sort of like critiqueing the "anti-christ" - ha ha . . . just kidding . . . sort of)
than a review. Anyway, in its current form,
I don't know what I'm going to do with it exactly.
Outline for Annotation Regarding Dawkins' "Selfish Gene" and Sociobiology in General
1. This Book Presumes That The Mathematical Discoveries Of Bertrand Russell And Alfred North Whitehead Were Never Made.
4. The Author Engages In A Grossly Excessive Mixing Of Metaphor With Literal Reality.
14. Claims that bigger, stronger is better.
17. He Presumes That Helpful-Or-Harmful ("Selfish-Or-Altruistic" In His Frame Of Thinking) Is Rooted In The Genes.
19. The Author Engages In A Gross Overmixing Of Studies And Guesses.
21. Presumes that deception is just another behavioral trait rather than that deception in humans is extremely destructive.
23. He Expresses Rage, I mean RAGE, that a bird of another species will adopt and care for a Cuckoo Bird.
26. He Presumes That All Ideas Of God Or Religion Are Anti-Science And Fraudulent.
Han Nolan
Dancing on the Edge
Harcourt Brace & Co., New York, 1997, 244 pages
Fiction, written for young people
Mildred D. Taylor
Roll of Thunder, Hear My Cry
Puffin Books/Penguin, New York, 1976, 276 pages
Fiction, written for young people
Jeremy Holmes
John Bowlby and Attachment Theory
Routledge, New York, 1993
224 pages plus bibliography and index
Includes a biography of Dr. Bowlby
. . . March, 1998
Aljean Harmetz
Round Up The Usual Suspects: The Making Of Casablanca - Bogart, Bergman, And World War II
Hyperion, New York, 1992
354 pages plus notes and sources, bibliography, and index
Susan Forbes Martin
Refugee Women
Zed, London, 1991. 128 pages.
Part of the Women and World Development Series.
This is a kind of handbook of background material written for UN officials, relief workers, and Non Governmental Organizations (NGO's) who attempt to deal with the horrific plight of the tens of millions of persons, 80% of whom are women and children, who have been driven from their homes by massacre, famine, and mass terror and who mostly find themselves crowded into large, desperate, concentrated camps all over the world. There's also a good deal of material on the extremely difficult plight of those who reach industrialized countries, and find themselves disoriented and often abandoned in Europe and North America. Something of a powerful counterpoint to much of the obscene anti-immigrant propaganda currently in vogue.
Amber Coverdale Sumrall and Patrice Vecchione (editors)
Catholic Girls
Plume/Penguin New York, 1992. 327 pages
These are very short, fictional stories; a collection of stories, poems, and memoirs by 52 Catholic Women.
In ways I hate to report ill of this book. But it must be said that this is not the story of Catholic girls, at least not as young people. Rather, it is short stories by adult women, using here and there, incidents they remember from days long gone. It is written almost entirely in the framework of adults, and the framework of young people is almost nowhere to be found in it. This is fictional writing by adults, for adults, and most to the point, almost entirely within the adult frame of reference. The frame of reference of teenagers and younger children, Catholic or otherwise, is, with rare exceptions, entirely absent. I'm not sure exactly why it was put together, not sure just what the editors had in mind, but if the book was named more accurately, perhaps that would be clearer. In that case, anyway, I no doubt would not have read it. It's my own fault perhaps, for not having read the copyright page more carefully; I do appreciate that the publisher does emphasize, in no uncertain terms, that the book is a work of fiction, and the biographies in the back make it clear that the writers are almost all experienced writers of adult literature. But I didn't realize all that until I was about halfway through. Enough said.
Barbara Dana
Young Joan
Harper, New York, 1991, 340 pages
Fiction written for young people.
Sleepy Child
weep for those who cry from pain
fight for those bound up in chains,
the day will come the sun will rise,
may sometimes pause but never ends and,
we'll light up the world . . . you and I . . .
- lullaby from the 1970's
From the 1970's album
"What Now People?", Vol. I
Important; Please see footnote 9
next previous
. . . April, 1998
Extra - March/April, 1998 - Media Frame-ups
New Moon - January/February, 1998 - Science
Hues - Spring, 1998 - Health
NACLA - March/April, 1998 - Columbia and Chiapas
Adbusters - Spring, 1998 - Pop Culture
iF - March/April, 1998 - Republican Party Coup D'Etat
Goran Burenhult (ed.)
The First Humans: Human Origins and History to 10,000 BC
HarperCollins, New York, 1993, 234 pages
From the American Museum of Natural History(p. 18) Nor is our tendency to kill each other unique. Lions, for example, sometimes kill other lions. But we are unique in lacking the behavioral controls found among many other species that would normally prevent such incidents. Caring for each other is not unique, either. Reciprocal altruism is not uncommon among animals, playing a straightforward evolutionary role by helping closely related individuals with similar genes to survive. True, humans attach moral values to caring for each other, but morals are probably a very recent development
Karen Bouris
The First Time: Women Speak Out
Conari Press, Berkeley, California, 1993
203 pages plus bibliography and appendix.
(April, 29, 1998)
Thomas S. Kuhn
The Structure of Scientific Revolutions
The University of Chicago Press, Chicago, 1970, 210 pages
Reread
(annotation in process - April 29, 1998, the below remarks appended in September, 1998 --- see earlier note on this book here)
But as the example of Newtonian dynamics also indicates, even the most striking past success provides no guarantee that crisis can be indefinitely postponed.
Always, too late for some things, just too damned late,
. . . and always too, and far more important, not too late for others.
Aparición Con Vida!
You Took Them Alive!
Return Them Alive!
. . . and, as always, . . . best wishes to all.
---- neil
Katherine Paterson
Rebels of the Heavenly Kingdom
Puffin/Penguin, New York, 1983 (1995), 227 pages
Fiction for Young People
Journals and Periodicals
Note: Clicking on the magazine's name will take you to their web-site. The listings below, however, refer to the issue listed, purchased at a newsstand, political event, or bookstore. I haven't read or reviewed the web-sites, but I include them here so that interested readers can learn more about the journal, and can find subscription information.
Issue Focus: Media Obsession With Republican Diversion Frame-ups (they call them "sex scandals" - I prefer the more accurate terminology in the case of attacks on Mr. Clinton - "diversionary frame-ups") (7 pages of 28).
Also: The media on Teamsters (2 pages); Right-wing "think" tanks (react-tanks) (3 pages); Pat Robertson (3 pages); firing of CIA/crack connection reporter (2 pages); Social security (2 pages); Food Irradiation (2 pages); State lotteries (2 pages). Also, Clinton's campaign promises, letters, shorts, Counterpoint radio program schedules nationwide (1 page each).
New Moon: The Magazine for Girls and Their Dreams, January/February, 1998, 48 pages,
plus an inserted 16 page catalogue of fascinating New Moon related books, CD ROM's, sweatshirts, tools, and other things for sale
Issue Focus: Science (30 pages of 48)
Also: Appeal for articles (2 pages); letters (4 pages); advice, calendar, cartoons, more (1 to 2 pages each).
This is actually an excellent journal that I hadn't previously known about. It's written by and for girls from about 8 to 14 years of age, and this issue contains about ten articles on science that I found quite informative, with useful and relevant science information that was, in fact, new to me. There's apparently a set of three related magazines - this one, "Teen Voices" which consists of stories by early high school girls (see note in the January listings above), and "Hues", written for older teenagers and college age young women (see below). I suppose they're kind of a tripartite alternative to the likes of 'Teen Idol", "Seventeen", "Mademoiselle", and so forth, but, well, almost not even an alternative strictly speaking - as these are written within an entirely different, and helpful framework. Very highly recommended.
Hues, Spring, 1988; Volume 4, Issue 2; 48 pages
Issue Focus: Health (16 pages of 48) including pieces on nutrition; 'recovering from stupid health advice'; breast cancer; yeast infections; doctors; and 6 pages on hiv.
Also: Fashion; pop music; film, shorts; Glide Church in SF (6 pages); tattoos; welfare; reviews; men against violence; Barbie.
This is kind of a fascinating journal, and also new to me. More than 'New Moon' and 'Teen Voices' mentioned above, this one attempts to fit a bit more closely into the general popular culture, although still decidedly outside the mass-media/advertising framework. I suppose the attempt to 'fit in' to popular culture results from the fact that it is aimed at young women who are in the process of starting to move away from the immediate protection of parents and childhood friends, starting to make their own way in the world, so to speak. And too much isolation, intellectual or otherwise, can be dangerous I suppose. Maybe I'm just too far away from this scene to understand, but, still and all, I still look, in vain, for some sort of modeling of organized, comprehensive figuring regarding solving the problems being faced. Boys do it, but maybe it's just too dangerous for girls. But I don't think so, but maybe . . . Oh well. Anyway, I was especially intrigued by the articles on health, especially the conversation between four women on encountering doctors - a disassociated conversation if there ever was one, but one that touched on probably twenty timely issues in just two pages; none conclusively but every one most relevant. All and all, this magazine is certainly recommended.
NACLA: Report on The Americas, March/April, 1998, 60 pages
Issue Focus: Columbia (26 pages) and Chiapas (16 pages) (tot. 42 pages of 60)
Also: Shorts (4 pages); letters (1 page); Sterilization in Peru (1 page); Book Review (1 page)
(4/29)
Issue Focus: Pop Culture Effect on Individuals (9 pages of 68)
Also: manufactured fear (3 pages), on the ads in Sierra magazine (2 pages), pulp mills (2 pages), Kyoto warming summit (1 page), planet Inc. (2 pages), buy nothing day (5 pages), Bell Canada essay ads (2 pages), media blackout of "anti-ad" ads (2 pages), short half-page articles (16 pages), letters (7 pages), poems, cartoons and many ad parodies.
This is in some ways an interesting journal, but I have difficulty with what I take to be its "no-real-truth" "postmodernist" style. At least that's the way I see it. It exposes the destructive nature of commercial advertising, and the culture-destroying corporations behind it, and it certainly is colorful and even startling, but the emphasis is so devoutly "anti", "no", "stop", without, as far as I can see, the slightest whiff of alternative, that it's hard for me to associate just what they're in favor of. Page after page after page of anti, anti, anti, kind of leaves a person, me anyway, a little in the blue, at best. I'll leave it at that for now.
iF: An Investigative Magazine from The Media Consortium, March/April, 1998; Vol. 2, No. 2; 36 pages
Issue Focus: Republican Party/Media Coup D'Etat Against Clinton (12 of 36 pages)
Also: Whitewashing Reagan era horrors (5 pages); Ignored Czech chemical warfare investigations during the Gulf War (3 pages), Iraq sanctions (2 pages), long-term U.S. manipulations towards Iraq (2 pages), CIA-driven cocaine trade (3 pages), remembering Tet-offensive reporting 30 years later (5 pages).
next previous
. . . May, 1998
Andrew Rowell
Green Backlash: Global Subversion of the Environmental Movement
Routledge, New York, 1996
Donald Johanson and Blake Edgar
From Lucy To Language
Photographs by David Brill
Simon & Schuster Editions, New York, 1996
261 pages plus Appendix, References, and index.
Includes about 200 very high quality photographs and illustrations.
read during May, annotation written in September
Katarina Tomasevski
Women and Human Rights
Zed, London, 1993
Part of the Women and World Development Series
142 pages, appendices, bibliography, index
This is about women world-wide suffering under intensive, life-numbing and life-crushing discriminations, hunger, and exploitation.Horacio Verbitsky
The Flight: Confessions of an Argentine Dirty Warrior
The New Press, New York, 1996
. . . June, 1998
Sojourner - April, 1998 - Prozac
CAQ - Winter, 1998 - Aparthied's Torture and Toxin Legacy
In These Times - ---, 1998 - Wellstone candidacy
Extra - May/June, 1998 - ---
The Nation - ---, 1998 - (alleged) "Science" (alleged) "Reporting" In The NY Times (Slimes)
Human Rights Watch Women's Rights Project
The Human Rights Watch Global Report On Women's Human Rights
Human Rights Watch, New York, 1995
459 pages
As far as I can tell at a glance, this book names the problem. That is, it describes the specific problem that the "Paradigm from California" project was originally designed to address. It seems to be a pretty gruesome story though . . . might turn out to be kind of difficult to read . . . -- June 3
Lt. Col. Dave Grossman
On Killing: The Psychological Cost Of Learning To Kill In War And Society
Little, Brown, 1995
I'm only about halfway through this book, but, in case I don't manage to post, anytime soon, the many still disassociated annotations that I've written for books recently read, there is a remark I feel compelled to make about this particular selection. This is an excellent book. In a certain sense, astounding really. Although the conclusions that I draw from Colonel Grossman's book are not new to me, the information, research, and general presentation are indeed new to me. Grossman's research of battles from Greek and Roman times, to the Napoleanic Wars to the American Civil war, to the Crimean war, World War One, World War Two, and Korea and Vietnam as well as others, shows that, up until Vietnam, the vast majority of combat soldiers through all history, who could actually see the opposing combatants face, exercised the "soldiers inalienable right to miss" (his phrase), or, even more often, to not fire at all in the first place. His analysis of what the firing lines at Gettysberg and Antium, for example, actually looked like (90% of the combatants not firing or deliberately missing) is a major eye opener. In fact, according to Grossman, the great carnage at such battles stemmed mostly from crew-manned artillery at such a far distance that the artillery crews could not see their human targets, very different from a single soldier getting a bead on another soldier who he could see.
Well, now I'm only about two thirds the way through this book, and while I find the Human Rights Watch book, and the Tattersall book to be quite good as well, and I've got a lot of notes about them, for some reason I feel like posting some more about this one.
-- June 28
Ian Tattersall
The Fossil Trail: How We Know What We Think We Know About Human Evolution
Oxford University Press, New York, 1995
247 pages plus bibliography and index
Journals and Periodicals
Sojourner: The Women's Forum, April, 1998; Vol. 23, No. 8; 32 pages
Issue Focus: Prozac On My Mind (7 of 32 pages)
Also: Slanders of Asian Women (1 page); Vanillistas fight back [yes! -nm] (2 pages); Right-Wing foundations lavishly fund reactionary research and the fascist press - 'Liberal' foundations starve ours almost to death (1 page); Ignoring Unsupported Moms (3 pages); Isolation of pregnant Latina teenagers (1 page); Prison Pregnancy (1 page); Angela Davis and others on women in prison (1 page); Lies, corporate toxins, and breast cancer (2 pages); AIDS, art, and Africa (1 page); Attempting to form a paradigm out of spiritualism (1 page); Quinacrine sterilization of women in nineteen countries so far (1 page); Critique of a self-help book (2 pages); more than 100 display notices (ads) for health and other services oriented towards women (10 pages).
Issue Focus: Reckoning With The Torture And Toxins Of Apartheid South Africa (19 of 52 pages)
Also: Briefs (2 pages); Right-Wing funding of national and media policy (11 pages); U.S. access to and control of all nations' secret diplomatic communications (7 pages); 'Promise Keepers' right-wing framework (6 pages); Books (2 pages).
Issue Focus: Wellstone Candidacy (4 pages of 40)
Also: Cuba (1 page); Letters (1 page); Workers - 80% organized - strike in Denmark; Shorts (1 page); 'People's Summit' (1 page); Irradiation (2 pages); FCC as corporate subsidiary (1 page); Bilingualism (1 page); Campaign Finance Reform (1 page); Right-wing scandals regarding Clinton (3 pages); Promoting Tobacco to African-American children (2 pages); Child slavery in the global economy (2 pages); Reactionary propositions on the California ballot (2 pages); Books (8 pages); Television torture in prisons (2 pages).
Issue Focus: How the Mass Media Undercuts Democracy (8 pages of 28)
Also: Characterizing pejorative terminology as objective terminology (3 pages); Right-wing PR as news (2 pages); Oprah's million-dollar lawyers don't portend a free press (2 pages); Public given details overtly, but framework covertly (3 pages); On fraudulent reporting of overseas elections (3 pages); Critique of 'postmodern' style of reporting on Iraq showdown protests (2 pages); "History" Channel as 'Wars R Us' (2 pages); On reporting of in-custody killing in San Francisco (2 pages); On selling off public broadcasting (3 pages); letters (1 page); shorts (1 page).
Issue Focus: (alleged) "Science" (alleged) "Reporting" In The NY Times
Also: Letters (2 pages); Clinton in China (2 pages); Congressional stock swappin' (2 pages); On Brill exposing Starr (1 page); Escalating NAFTA (1 page); Toxifying rural Louisiana (1 page); Shorts (1 page); Cockburn on Saywer charades (1 page); Hollywood charades (1 page); Newsroom anti-diversity campaign (1 page); "Indian" gambling (2 pages); Amnesty International letter to Levi Strauss (2 pages); Postmodern essays on history (7 pages); Books: On Holbrooke and others in Yugoslavia (4 pages); More books (9 pages).
next previous
. . . July, 1998
Cynthia Voigt
Homecoming
Fawcett Juniper, New York, 1981, 372 pages
Fiction, written for young people
Thomas Pakenham
Meetings With Remarkable Trees
Random House, New York, 1997
185 pages plus Gazetteer, Bibliography, and Index
Includes about 100 absolutely incredible, large, full-color, knockout photographs
Robin Kirk
The Monkey's Paw: New Chronicles From Peru
University of Massachusetts Press, Amherst, Massachusetts, 1997
211 pages plus bibliography.
Sheila Cole
The Dragon in the Cliff: A novel based on the life of Mary Anning
Lothrop, Lee & Shepard Books, New York, 1991
211 pages
Fiction, written for young people
Ian Tattersall
Becoming Human: Evolution and Human Uniqueness
Harcourt Brace & Company, New York, 1998
241 pages plus bibliography and index
George McGovern
Terry: My Daughter's Life-And-Death Struggle With Alcoholism
Villard, New York, 1996
208 pages
. . . August, 1998
Kara Dalkey
Little Sister
Puffin Books/Penguin, New York, 1996
196 pages plus glossary
Fiction, written for young people
Lawrence Weschler
A Miracle, A Universe: Settling Accounts with Torturers
University of Chicago Press, Chicago, 1990 (1998)
282 pages plus references and index
Jennifer J. Freyd
Betrayal Trauma: The Logic of Forgetting Childhood Abuse
Harvard University Press, Cambridge, 1996
199 pages plus references and index
Robert Jay Lifton
The Nazi Doctors: Medical Killing and the Psychology of Genocide
Basic Books, Inc., New York, 1986
504 pages plus notes and index
Donald E. Miller and Lorna Touryan Miller
Survivors: An Oral History of the Armenian Genocide
University of California Press, Berkeley, 1993
192 pages plus appendices, notes, bibliography, and index
Sharon Creech
Walk Two Moons
Harper Trophy, New York, 1994
280 pages
Fiction written for young people
. . . September, 1998
Fermat's Enigma by Simon Singh 1997
Bat 6 by Virginia Euwer Wolff (fiction, written for young people) 1998
Marilyn Monroe by Donald Spoto 1993
The Golden Compass by Philip Pullman (fiction, written for young people) 1995
A Lexicon of Terror by Marguerite Feitlowitz 1998
Song of the Magdalene by Donna Jo Napoli (fiction, written for young people) 1996
Simon Singh
Fermat's Enigma
Walker and Company, New York, 1997
285 pages plus appendixes, bibliography, index"This statement is inaccurate."
Virginia Euwer Wolff
Bat 6
Scholastic Press, New York, 1998
230 pages
Fiction written for young people
Marilyn Monroe
Donald Spoto
HarperCollins, New York, 1993
611 pages plus notes, bibliography, filmography, and index
Philip Pullman
The Golden Compass
Alfred A. Knopf, New York, 1995
399 pages
Fiction written for young people"Some say that he [the evil pretender king] provoked Iroek [the good real king] into the deed for which he [the good king] was exiled . . . "
Marguerite Feitlowitz
A Lexicon of Terror: Argentina and the Legacies of Torture
Oxford University Press, New York, 1998
255 pages plus notes, bibliography, and index
Donna Jo Napoli
Song of the Magadlene
Scholastic, Inc., New York, 1996
240 pages
Fiction written for young people
Books that I liked the most
Best
Science
Children
History
Also Very Good
Articulation
Special Violence
Struggle
The Scramble
Helpful, Informative
On Betrayal
More History
Two Others
Catholic Girls by Amber Coverdale Sumrall and Patrice Vecchione (editors) 1992
Note: The above listing is in order of how much I liked the book,
based on a wide combination of criteria,
such as how 'to-the-point' of this paradigm it is,
plus how well it's written (which means accessible to the general public),
plus how new, unique, or important I found it to be,
plus how well it displays the 'paradigm from california' frame of reference,
plus how much it affected me emotionally,
and a variety of other factors,
some of which are perhaps a bit esoteric and
some of which I can't exactly articulate right now.
It's sort of summed up by the phrase: "how much I liked the book".
based exclusively on how 'new-to-me' and valuable to me
I found the scientific research to be.
I drop the "well-written" and other criteria from the below list
but rate the books solely on how much of a new influence
on my specifically scientific thinking I expect them to have.
Betrayal Trauma: The Logic of Forgetting Childhood Abuse by Jennifer J. Freyd 1996
The Fossil Trail by Ian Tattersall 1995
(The following was written between February 10th, and March 13th, 1999, and posted on March 13th. It is about 6,300 words long.)
Note: For reasons even I don't fully understand, it's been several months since I've been able to update this bibliography. The primary reason is because I haven't been able to afford almost any new books, or any necessary computer supplies - disk space, printer cartridge, or any other utilities - or even food for that matter, but that doesn't really explain things entirely, because there are other difficulties. Well, enough about that. Robert Augros and George Stanciu
The New Biology: Discovering the Wisdom in Nature
Illustrations by Michael Augros
New Science Library/Shambhalla, Boston and London, 1987
231 Pages plus notes, bibliography, index
Stars
(February 10th, 1999)
Stars
Complement
Reductionism
Materialism
Dialectics
The Observer in Physics
The 'Third Party' in Law
The Observer as an Educational Model
Loopholes
It Takes Three To Make A System
From Protons to Pluto
The Alleged 'Machine' Metaphor
Autonomy
Harmony
The Dark Ages in River City
Darwin
The Graphics Tablet
[a species] harbors superfluous genetic material (the "seed" of a new species, as it were) that slowly develops an unexpressed new body plan. During this long developmental period, no morphological change occurs in individuals of the parent species. . . . a new species finally appears, suddenly and fully formed . . .
All-At-Once-System-Advancement
Revolution
The Dreamtime
Trouble
Social Science
Co-optation
Hope and Fear
Natural Selection
Permutations
Gap
The Guessing Game